1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \default_output_format pdf2
74 \bibtex_command bibtex
75 \index_command default
79 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
80 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
84 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
85 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
86 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
91 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
92 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
95 \use_package amsmath 1
96 \use_package amssymb 1
99 \use_package mathdots 1
100 \use_package mathtools 0
101 \use_package mhchem 1
102 \use_package stackrel 0
103 \use_package stmaryrd 0
104 \use_package undertilde 0
106 \cite_engine_type default
110 \paperorientation portrait
114 \notefontcolor #0000ff
131 \paragraph_separation skip
133 \quotes_language english
136 \paperpagestyle default
137 \tracking_changes false
138 \output_changes false
152 by the \SpecialChar LyX
157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
159 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
160 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
161 Documentation mailing list:
162 \begin_inset CommandInset href
164 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
175 \begin_inset Newline newline
179 \begin_inset Newline newline
183 \begin_inset Note Note
186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
187 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
193 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
194 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
202 \begin_layout Standard
203 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
204 LatexCommand tableofcontents
211 \begin_layout Chapter
215 \begin_layout Section
216 What is \SpecialChar LyX
220 \begin_layout Standard
222 is a document preparation system.
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
224 scripts, publishable books, business
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
226 It is unlike most other
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 pt type, left justified, 5
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
262 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
266 \begin_layout Standard
267 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
272 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
276 \begin_layout Standard
281 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
282 's philosophy: most importantly,
283 the format of all of the manuals.
284 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
285 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
291 manual describes that, too.
294 \begin_layout Section
299 \begin_layout Standard
300 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
301 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
303 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
304 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
308 \begin_layout Standard
309 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
310 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
311 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
313 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
314 only a vertical scrollbar.
315 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
316 The first case is large images.
317 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
318 image and use the option
329 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
332 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
333 this doesn't work for equations yet.
336 \begin_layout Standard
337 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
338 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
346 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
353 \begin_layout Section
357 \begin_layout Standard
358 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
360 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
362 Just select the manual you want to read from the
369 \begin_layout Section
370 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
372 \begin_inset CommandInset label
374 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
381 \begin_layout Standard
382 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
383 can be configured via the menu
385 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
389 \begin_inset Index idx
392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
399 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
401 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
402 packages are available.
403 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
405 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
407 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
412 \begin_inset space \space{}
415 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
416 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
418 To force \SpecialChar LyX
419 to re-inspect your system, you should use
421 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
425 \begin_inset Index idx
428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
429 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
435 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
436 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
439 \begin_layout Section
442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
444 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
451 \begin_layout Standard
452 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
453 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
454 installed, but you will not be
455 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
456 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
457 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
458 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
459 document can always be output as plain text
463 \begin_layout Standard
464 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
465 or DocBook classes or packages.
466 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
467 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
473 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
476 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
484 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
485 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
488 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 \begin_inset Index idx
495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
496 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
504 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
511 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
515 \begin_layout Chapter
516 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
520 \begin_layout Section
521 Basic File Operations
522 \begin_inset Index idx
525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
534 \begin_layout Standard
539 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
540 in addition to some more advanced operations:
543 \begin_layout Itemize
565 \begin_layout Itemize
581 arg "buffer-new-template"
587 \begin_layout Itemize
609 \begin_layout Itemize
619 \begin_layout Itemize
633 \begin_layout Itemize
655 \begin_layout Itemize
667 arg "buffer-write-as"
673 \begin_layout Itemize
687 \begin_layout Itemize
701 \begin_layout Standard
702 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
703 a few minor differences.
706 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
717 command lists the available templates.
718 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
719 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
720 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
722 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
728 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
735 \begin_layout Standard
736 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
768 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
769 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
770 is just that — a big, blank space.
778 \begin_layout Standard
799 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
804 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
807 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
825 will reload the document from disk.
826 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
827 and want to restore it to the last save.
836 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
837 them as your changes.
840 \begin_layout Section
841 Basic Editing Features
842 \begin_inset Index idx
845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
852 \begin_inset CommandInset label
854 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
861 \begin_layout Standard
862 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
863 can perform cut and paste operations
864 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
865 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
866 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
867 editing features and how to access
869 We will start with cut and paste.
872 \begin_layout Standard
873 As you might expect, the
877 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
878 various other editing features.
879 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
883 \begin_layout Itemize
889 \begin_inset Index idx
892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
921 \begin_layout Itemize
927 \begin_inset Index idx
930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
959 \begin_layout Itemize
965 \begin_inset Index idx
968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
993 \begin_layout Itemize
1003 \begin_layout Itemize
1007 \begin_inset space ~
1013 \begin_layout Itemize
1017 \begin_inset space ~
1021 \begin_inset space ~
1027 \begin_inset Index idx
1030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1039 \begin_inset Index idx
1042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1057 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1067 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1073 \begin_layout Standard
1074 The first three are self-explanatory.
1075 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1076 and other programs by
1097 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1098 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1103 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1104 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1105 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1106 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1107 into individual cells.
1111 \begin_inset space ~
1116 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1117 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1121 \begin_layout Standard
1125 \begin_inset space ~
1130 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1132 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1134 \begin_inset space ~
1141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1147 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1148 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1149 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1151 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1155 \begin_inset space \space{}
1158 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1159 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1162 \begin_inset space ~
1165 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1167 \begin_inset space ~
1171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1175 \begin_inset space ~
1184 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1185 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1187 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1191 \begin_inset space ~
1196 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1197 start a new paragraph.
1198 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1199 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1204 \begin_inset space ~
1207 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1213 \begin_inset space ~
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1224 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1227 paste from the primary selection.
1228 This is normally the currently selected text.
1231 \begin_layout Standard
1234 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1236 \begin_inset space ~
1240 \begin_inset space ~
1248 \begin_inset space ~
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1258 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1264 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1276 \begin_inset space ~
1281 button to skip the current word.
1285 \begin_inset space ~
1290 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1294 \begin_inset space ~
1299 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1301 If the toggle is set, searching for
1302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1313 will not match the word
1314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1328 Match whole words only
1330 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1331 to only find complete words, e.
1332 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1361 offers also an advanced
1364 \begin_inset space ~
1368 \begin_inset space ~
1373 feature that is described in sec.
1374 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1380 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1387 \begin_layout Standard
1388 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1389 \begin_inset space \space{}
1393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1401 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1403 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1408 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1415 \begin_layout Standard
1419 arg "inset-select-all"
1422 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1423 When the cursor is inside an inset
1426 arg "inset-select-all"
1429 selects the content of the inset.
1433 arg "inset-select-all"
1436 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1441 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1444 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1448 \begin_layout Section
1450 \begin_inset Index idx
1453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1460 \begin_inset Index idx
1463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1472 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1479 \begin_layout Standard
1480 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1482 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1485 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1488 or the toolbar button
1494 to undo some mistake.
1495 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1497 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1500 or the toolbar button
1507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1514 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1515 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1518 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1521 \begin_layout Standard
1522 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1531 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1532 This is a consequence of the 100
1533 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1536 step undo limit mentioned above.
1539 \begin_layout Standard
1548 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1550 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1554 \begin_layout Section
1556 \begin_inset Index idx
1559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1568 \begin_layout Standard
1569 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1572 \begin_layout Enumerate
1577 \begin_layout Itemize
1582 once anywhere in the edit window.
1583 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1587 \begin_layout Enumerate
1592 \begin_layout Itemize
1599 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1602 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1605 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1606 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1609 \begin_layout Itemize
1610 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1613 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1620 \begin_layout Enumerate
1621 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1625 \begin_layout Standard
1626 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1627 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1631 \begin_layout Section
1633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1635 name "sec:Navigating"
1640 \begin_inset Index idx
1643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1652 \begin_layout Standard
1654 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1657 \begin_layout Itemize
1662 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1663 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1666 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1669 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1671 \begin_inset space ~
1676 or by the toolbar button
1679 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1685 \begin_layout Itemize
1686 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1688 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1691 and use the same menu to return to them.
1692 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1695 \begin_layout Standard
1699 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1704 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1705 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1707 \begin_inset space ~
1712 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1713 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1714 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1715 your last editing position.
1718 \begin_layout Standard
1723 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1727 \begin_layout Subsection
1729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1731 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1736 \begin_inset Index idx
1739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1740 Navigating ! Outline
1746 \begin_inset Index idx
1749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1758 \begin_layout Standard
1759 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1760 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1761 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1763 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1769 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1773 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1774 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1780 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1785 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1789 \begin_layout Standard
1790 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1791 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1792 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1793 dialog and to modify the citation.
1796 \begin_layout Standard
1797 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1799 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1800 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1808 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1811 \begin_layout Standard
1812 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1813 you further to control the display.
1818 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1819 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1825 option keeps it in the current view state.
1826 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1827 \begin_inset space ~
1830 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1831 \begin_inset space ~
1834 3, the subsections of sections
1835 \begin_inset space ~
1838 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1843 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1844 \begin_inset space ~
1848 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1858 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1861 \begin_layout Standard
1868 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1869 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1883 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1884 So, for example, you can move section
1885 \begin_inset space ~
1889 \begin_inset space ~
1892 2.4 or after section
1893 \begin_inset space ~
1898 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1911 (or the corresponding key bindings
1919 ) you can change the level of sections.
1920 So you can for example make section
1921 \begin_inset space ~
1925 \begin_inset space ~
1929 \begin_inset space ~
1935 \begin_layout Subsection
1936 Horizontal Scrolling
1937 \begin_inset Index idx
1940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1941 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1949 \begin_layout Standard
1951 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1953 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1957 \begin_inset space \space{}
1961 \begin_inset space ~
1964 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1965 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1966 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1970 \begin_layout Standard
1971 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1975 \begin_layout Itemize
1977 is used on a small tablet computer
1980 \begin_layout Itemize
1981 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
1985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1993 \begin_inset space ~
2006 \begin_layout Itemize
2007 Math constructs with long command names
2010 \begin_layout Standard
2011 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2012 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2014 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2015 windows so that table
2016 \begin_inset space ~
2020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2022 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2027 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2029 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2030 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2033 \begin_layout Standard
2034 \begin_inset Float table
2040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2041 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2046 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2050 Horizontal scrolling test.
2058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2060 \begin_inset Tabular
2061 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2062 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2063 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2064 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2065 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2107 \begin_layout Section
2108 Input/Word Completion
2109 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2111 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2116 \begin_inset Index idx
2119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2126 \begin_inset Index idx
2129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2160 \begin_layout Standard
2162 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2164 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2165 is used to propose completions.
2168 \begin_layout Standard
2169 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2172 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2177 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2184 \begin_inset space ~
2188 \begin_inset space ~
2193 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2197 \begin_inset space ~
2202 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2203 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2207 \begin_inset space ~
2213 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2214 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2215 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2216 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2219 \begin_layout Standard
2221 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2222 completions available.
2227 key to accept a proposed completion.
2228 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2229 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2230 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2237 \begin_layout Standard
2238 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2239 ing options for text.
2240 The special math option
2244 enables characters to be composed.
2245 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2246 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2249 , you can then input the characters
2250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2261 to a formula to get it.
2262 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2263 of the math toolbar.
2264 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2268 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2269 's installation folder.
2270 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2279 \begin_layout Section
2281 \begin_inset Index idx
2284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2291 \begin_inset Index idx
2294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2323 \begin_inset Index idx
2326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2357 \begin_layout Standard
2358 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2372 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2375 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2379 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2380 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2386 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2393 \begin_layout Standard
2397 \begin_inset space ~
2405 \begin_inset space ~
2426 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2430 \begin_layout Labeling
2431 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2435 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2436 LatexCommand nomenclature
2438 description "Tabulator key"
2444 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2446 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2447 \begin_inset space ~
2451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2453 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2460 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2464 , especially section
2465 \begin_inset space ~
2469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2471 reference "subsec:Lists"
2477 If you are still confused, look in the
2482 \begin_inset Newline newline
2490 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2491 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2495 \begin_layout Labeling
2496 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2500 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2501 LatexCommand nomenclature
2503 description "Escape key"
2510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2517 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2518 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2521 \begin_layout Labeling
2522 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2528 \begin_inset space ~
2532 \begin_inset space ~
2539 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2540 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2544 \begin_layout Standard
2545 There are three modifier keys:
2548 \begin_layout Labeling
2549 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2567 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2568 LatexCommand nomenclature
2570 description "Control key"
2574 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2575 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2579 \begin_layout Itemize
2588 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2591 \begin_layout Itemize
2600 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2603 \begin_layout Itemize
2612 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2616 \begin_layout Labeling
2617 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2635 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2636 LatexCommand nomenclature
2638 description "Shift key"
2642 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2643 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2646 \begin_layout Labeling
2647 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2665 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2666 LatexCommand nomenclature
2668 description "Alt or Meta key"
2672 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2673 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2674 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2680 \begin_inset Newline newline
2683 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2685 menu accelerator keys
2688 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2689 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2693 \begin_layout Standard
2694 For example, the sequence
2695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2701 \begin_inset space ~
2705 \begin_inset space ~
2711 \begin_inset space ~
2719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2738 \begin_inset space ~
2744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2754 \begin_layout Standard
2759 manual lists all other things bound to the
2767 \begin_layout Standard
2768 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2770 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2771 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2772 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2773 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2774 The \SpecialChar LyX
2775 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2776 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2777 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2779 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2795 followed by a capital
2802 \begin_layout Chapter
2805 \begin_inset Index idx
2808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2818 \begin_layout Section
2820 \begin_inset Index idx
2823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2832 \begin_layout Subsection
2836 \begin_layout Standard
2837 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2838 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2839 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2840 numbering schemes, and so on.
2841 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2842 and format the title of your document differently.
2845 \begin_layout Standard
2850 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2851 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2852 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2853 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2854 picks one for you by default.
2855 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2858 \begin_layout Subsection
2860 \begin_inset Index idx
2863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2870 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2872 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2879 \begin_layout Standard
2880 You can select a class using the
2882 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2883 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2887 \begin_inset Index idx
2890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2897 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2901 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2905 \begin_layout Standard
2906 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2911 \begin_layout Description
2912 Article for basic articles
2915 \begin_layout Description
2916 Report for basic reports
2919 \begin_layout Description
2920 Book for writing a book
2923 \begin_layout Description
2924 Letter for US-style letters
2927 \begin_layout Standard
2928 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2929 only uses if you have installed
2930 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2931 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2932 distributions will include
2934 Here are some of the classes.
2935 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2937 Special Document Classes
2946 \begin_layout Description
2947 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2950 \begin_layout Description
2951 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2955 \begin_layout Description
2956 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2960 \begin_layout Description
2961 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2962 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2963 There are three article layouts available.
2964 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2965 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2966 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2967 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2972 sequential numbering
2973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2976 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2977 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2978 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2979 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2982 \begin_layout Description
2983 Beamer Layout for presentations
2986 \begin_layout Description
2987 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2988 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2989 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2990 with \SpecialChar LyX
2994 \begin_layout Description
2995 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2998 \begin_layout Description
3000 \begin_inset space ~
3003 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3006 \begin_layout Description
3007 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3010 \begin_layout Description
3011 Foils Used to make transparencies
3014 \begin_layout Description
3015 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3016 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3017 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3018 with \SpecialChar LyX
3022 \begin_layout Description
3023 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3024 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3027 \begin_layout Description
3028 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3031 \begin_layout Description
3032 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3035 \begin_layout Description
3036 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3037 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3038 (Is used by this document.)
3041 \begin_layout Description
3042 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3045 \begin_layout Description
3046 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3049 \begin_layout Description
3054 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3055 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3057 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3061 \begin_layout Description
3062 Slides Used to make transparencies
3065 \begin_layout Description
3067 \begin_inset space ~
3070 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3071 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3074 \begin_layout Description
3075 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3078 \begin_layout Standard
3079 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3081 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3083 Special Document Classes
3090 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3091 of the document classes.
3094 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3098 \begin_layout Standard
3099 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3101 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3102 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3104 \begin_inset Index idx
3107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3124 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3125 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3127 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3130 \begin_layout Standard
3133 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3138 , are highly specialized.
3140 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3141 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3142 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3143 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3144 by some document class.
3145 There are just too many of them.
3146 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3149 \begin_layout Standard
3150 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3158 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3159 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3160 document class for a new file.
3162 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3165 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3172 manual for information on how to install them.
3173 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3179 \begin_layout Standard
3180 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3181 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3182 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3183 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3184 class files to be used for dissertation
3185 s submitted to those universities.
3186 The \SpecialChar LyX
3187 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3189 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3193 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3199 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3202 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3204 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3206 name "subsec:Modules"
3211 \begin_inset Index idx
3214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3223 \begin_layout Standard
3224 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3225 chosen document class.
3226 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3227 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3234 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3238 \begin_inset Index idx
3241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3248 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3252 \begin_layout Standard
3253 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3254 packages or file format converters that are not always
3255 installed by default.
3257 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3258 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3259 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3260 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3262 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3263 file without the missing prerequisites.
3264 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3265 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3268 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3272 \begin_inset Index idx
3275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3276 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3282 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3287 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3290 \begin_layout Standard
3291 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3299 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3301 will advise you about these things.
3309 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3311 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3313 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3318 \begin_inset Index idx
3321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3322 Document ! Local Layout
3330 \begin_layout Standard
3331 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3332 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3333 : They are intended to be used in
3334 a variety of different documents.
3335 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3336 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3337 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3338 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3339 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3341 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3359 manual for information on how to use it.
3362 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3366 \begin_layout Standard
3367 Each class has a default set of options.
3368 Here's a quick table describing them:
3371 \begin_layout Standard
3372 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3378 \begin_layout Standard
3380 \begin_inset Tabular
3381 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3382 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3383 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3384 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3385 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3386 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3387 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3841 \begin_layout Standard
3842 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3848 \begin_layout Standard
3849 You're probably also wondering what
3850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3854 \begin_inset space ~
3858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3862 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3863 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3868 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3873 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3883 headings, there are also
3891 headings, and so on.
3892 We will describe these headings fully in section
3893 \begin_inset space ~
3897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3899 reference "subsec:Headings"
3906 \begin_layout Subsection
3908 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3910 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3915 \begin_inset Index idx
3918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3925 \begin_inset Index idx
3928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3937 \begin_layout Standard
3938 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3940 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3947 \begin_inset space ~
3955 \begin_inset space ~
3960 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3962 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3963 doesn't support special options you want to
3964 use for your document.
3965 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3966 -class and its options, you have to read
3970 \begin_layout Standard
3974 \begin_inset space ~
3981 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3987 \begin_inset space ~
3992 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3993 You can choose between the following five options:
3996 \begin_layout Labeling
3997 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4002 Use default page style of current class.
4005 \begin_layout Labeling
4006 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4011 No page numbers or headings.
4014 \begin_layout Labeling
4015 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4023 \begin_layout Labeling
4024 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4029 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4030 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4031 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4032 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4035 \begin_layout Labeling
4036 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4041 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4042 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4048 \begin_inset Index idx
4051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4053 -packages ! fancyhdr
4059 How they are defined is explained in section
4060 \begin_inset space ~
4064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4066 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4073 \begin_layout Standard
4074 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4075 \begin_inset space ~
4079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4081 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4088 \begin_layout Subsection
4089 Paper Size and Orientation
4090 \begin_inset Index idx
4093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4094 Document ! Paper size
4100 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4102 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4109 \begin_layout Standard
4110 You can find the following options in the menu
4113 \begin_inset space ~
4120 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4124 \begin_inset Index idx
4127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4136 \begin_layout Labeling
4137 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4141 \begin_inset space ~
4146 What size paper to print on.
4151 \begin_layout Itemize
4157 \begin_layout Itemize
4163 \begin_layout Itemize
4169 \begin_layout Itemize
4175 \begin_layout Itemize
4178 US letter, US legal, US executive
4181 \begin_layout Itemize
4187 \begin_layout Itemize
4194 \begin_layout Labeling
4195 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4200 To choose whether to output as
4211 \begin_layout Labeling
4212 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4216 \begin_inset space ~
4221 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4222 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4225 \begin_layout Subsection
4227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4229 name "subsec:Margins"
4234 \begin_inset Index idx
4237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4244 \begin_inset Index idx
4247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4256 \begin_layout Standard
4257 Paper margins are set in the menu
4259 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4263 \begin_inset Index idx
4266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4275 \begin_layout Standard
4276 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4277 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4278 the paper format and the font size into account.
4281 \begin_layout Subsection
4285 \begin_layout Standard
4286 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4292 That includes the paragraph environments.
4293 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4294 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4295 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4297 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4306 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4308 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4309 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4310 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4313 \begin_layout Section
4314 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4315 \begin_inset Index idx
4318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4319 Paragraph ! Indentation
4327 \begin_layout Subsection
4329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4331 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4338 \begin_layout Standard
4339 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4340 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4343 \begin_layout Standard
4344 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4345 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4346 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4347 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4351 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4357 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4358 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4359 language than English.
4361 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4364 \begin_layout Standard
4365 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4366 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4367 into \SpecialChar LyX
4369 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4372 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4374 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4375 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4376 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4383 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4384 goes to produce a printable file.
4389 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4391 gives you the ability globally to change
4395 these pre-coded spacings.
4396 We will explain more later.
4399 \begin_layout Subsection
4400 Paragraph Separation
4401 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4403 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4408 \begin_inset Index idx
4411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4412 Paragraph ! Separation
4420 \begin_layout Standard
4428 \begin_inset space ~
4436 \begin_inset space ~
4443 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4447 \begin_inset Index idx
4450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4456 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4459 \begin_layout Subsection
4463 \begin_layout Standard
4464 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4467 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4469 \begin_inset space ~
4474 dialog and toggle the
4477 \begin_inset space ~
4482 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4485 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4489 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4490 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4494 \begin_layout Standard
4495 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4496 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4499 \begin_layout Subsection
4501 \begin_inset Index idx
4504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4505 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4513 \begin_layout Standard
4516 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4520 \begin_inset Index idx
4523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4532 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4536 \begin_inset space ~
4545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4546 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4552 \begin_inset Index idx
4555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4557 -packages ! setspace
4562 installed to use this feature.
4567 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4569 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4571 \begin_inset space ~
4576 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4577 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4580 \begin_layout Section
4581 Paragraph Environments
4582 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4584 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4589 \begin_inset Index idx
4592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4593 Paragraph ! Environments
4599 \begin_inset Index idx
4602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4603 Paragraph environments|(
4611 \begin_layout Subsection
4615 \begin_layout Standard
4616 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4619 \begin_layout Standard
4638 \begin_inset Newline newline
4641 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4643 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4644 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4645 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4654 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4657 \begin_layout Standard
4658 A paragraph environment is simply a
4659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4666 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4667 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4668 scheme, labels, and so on.
4669 Additionally, you can
4670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4677 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4678 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4679 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4680 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4682 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4684 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4687 \begin_layout Standard
4688 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4689 \begin_inset Graphics
4690 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4696 at the left end of the toolbar.
4698 will change the environment of the
4702 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4703 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4704 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4708 \begin_layout Standard
4717 create a new paragraph using the
4721 paragraph environment.
4723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4730 because if you are in one of these environments:
4733 \begin_layout Itemize
4739 \begin_layout Itemize
4745 \begin_layout Itemize
4751 \begin_layout Itemize
4757 \begin_layout Itemize
4763 \begin_layout Itemize
4769 \begin_layout Itemize
4775 \begin_layout Standard
4777 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4781 , rather than resetting it to
4786 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4787 \begin_inset space ~
4791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4793 reference "sec:Nesting"
4800 \begin_layout Subsection
4804 \begin_layout Standard
4805 The default paragraph environment is
4810 It creates a plain paragraph.
4812 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4813 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4814 this manual) are in the
4821 \begin_layout Standard
4822 You can nest a paragraph using the
4826 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4834 \begin_layout Subsection
4836 \begin_inset Index idx
4839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4848 \begin_layout Standard
4849 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4850 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4859 for thanks or contact information.
4860 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4861 places all of this on a separate page
4862 along with today's date.
4863 For other types of documents, the title
4864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4871 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4875 \begin_layout Standard
4877 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4891 Here's how you use them:
4894 \begin_layout Itemize
4895 Put the title of your document in the
4902 \begin_layout Itemize
4903 Put the author name in the
4910 \begin_layout Itemize
4911 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4912 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4918 Note that using this environment is optional.
4919 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4920 will automatically insert today's date.
4921 If you don't want a date, use the option
4923 Suppress default date on front page
4927 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4928 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4930 \begin_inset space ~
4938 \begin_layout Standard
4939 You can use footnotes to insert
4940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4947 or contact information.
4950 \begin_layout Subsection
4952 \begin_inset Index idx
4955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4962 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4964 name "subsec:Headings"
4971 \begin_layout Standard
4972 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4974 takes care of the numbering for you.
4977 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4979 \begin_inset Index idx
4982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4983 Section headings ! Numbered
4991 \begin_layout Standard
4992 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4996 \begin_layout Enumerate
5002 \begin_layout Enumerate
5008 \begin_layout Enumerate
5014 \begin_layout Enumerate
5020 \begin_layout Enumerate
5026 \begin_layout Enumerate
5032 \begin_layout Enumerate
5038 \begin_layout Standard
5040 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5041 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5042 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5045 \begin_layout Standard
5046 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5047 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5048 You group the book into chapters.
5050 does a similar grouping:
5053 \begin_layout Itemize
5058 is divided into either
5069 \begin_layout Itemize
5081 \begin_layout Itemize
5093 \begin_layout Itemize
5105 \begin_layout Itemize
5117 \begin_layout Itemize
5129 \begin_layout Standard
5130 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5138 Not all document types use the
5142 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5147 is the top-level heading.
5155 \begin_layout Standard
5160 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5161 labels it with its number,
5162 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5164 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5176 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5178 \begin_inset Index idx
5181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5182 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5190 \begin_layout Standard
5191 The unnumbered section headings have a
5192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5199 at the end of their name.
5200 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5201 the table of contents, see section
5202 \begin_inset space ~
5206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5215 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5216 Changing the Numbering
5217 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5219 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5226 \begin_layout Standard
5227 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5228 in the Table of Contents.
5229 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5231 Just as certain classes start with
5245 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5255 This is something you can change.
5258 \begin_layout Standard
5261 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5265 \begin_inset Index idx
5268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5277 \begin_inset space ~
5281 \begin_inset space ~
5286 you will see two counters.
5291 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5292 numbers a section heading.
5293 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5297 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5298 Short Titles of Headings
5299 \begin_inset Index idx
5302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5303 Section headings ! Short titles
5309 \begin_inset Argument 1
5312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5319 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5321 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5328 \begin_layout Standard
5329 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5330 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5331 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5332 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5335 \begin_layout Standard
5337 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5338 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5339 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5340 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5343 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5345 \begin_inset space ~
5351 This will insert a box labeled
5352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5356 \begin_inset space ~
5360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5363 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5364 This also works for captions inside floats.
5365 There can only be one short title per title.
5368 \begin_layout Standard
5369 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5372 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5376 \begin_layout Standard
5377 The following information applies to all section headings:
5380 \begin_layout Itemize
5381 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5384 \begin_layout Itemize
5385 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5388 \begin_layout Itemize
5389 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5392 \begin_layout Itemize
5393 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5396 \begin_layout Subsection
5400 \begin_layout Standard
5402 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5416 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5417 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5418 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5419 the text they contain.
5420 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5428 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5431 \begin_layout Standard
5432 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5441 when you start a new paragraph.
5442 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5446 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5447 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5448 have to change back to the
5452 environment yourself.
5455 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5464 \begin_inset Index idx
5467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5476 \begin_layout Standard
5477 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5478 time for the differences.
5487 are identical except for one difference:
5491 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5500 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5503 \begin_layout Standard
5504 Here's an example of the
5517 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5519 See – no indentation!
5523 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5524 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5525 the other paragraph.
5528 \begin_layout Standard
5529 Here's another example, this time in the
5536 \begin_layout Quotation
5542 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5543 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5544 the first line, then
5548 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5552 you were quoting other text.
5555 \begin_layout Quotation
5556 Here's a new paragraph.
5557 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5558 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5561 \begin_layout Standard
5562 As the examples show,
5566 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5567 They should put quotes in the
5572 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5576 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5579 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5581 \begin_inset Index idx
5584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5591 \begin_inset Index idx
5594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5610 \begin_layout Standard
5615 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5621 \begin_inset Newline newline
5624 Which I did not rehearse!
5628 It could be much worse.
5629 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5631 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5632 indented a bit more than the first.
5633 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5639 \begin_inset Newline newline
5642 And make things look fine
5643 \begin_inset Newline newline
5649 arg "newline-insert newline"
5655 \begin_layout Standard
5660 does not indent both margins.
5661 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5662 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5665 arg "newline-insert newline"
5671 \begin_layout Subsection
5673 \begin_inset Index idx
5676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5692 \begin_layout Standard
5694 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5704 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5705 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5714 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5715 lets you provide your own label.
5716 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5717 describing some general features of all four of them.
5720 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5724 \begin_layout Standard
5725 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5727 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5728 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5737 reset the environment to
5741 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5742 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5743 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5747 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5751 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5758 \begin_layout Standard
5759 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5760 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5761 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5763 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5764 you read all of section
5765 \begin_inset space ~
5769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5771 reference "sec:Nesting"
5778 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5780 \begin_inset Index idx
5783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5790 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5799 \begin_layout Standard
5800 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5804 paragraph environment.
5805 It has the following properties:
5808 \begin_layout Itemize
5809 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5813 \begin_layout Itemize
5815 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5818 \begin_layout Itemize
5819 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5823 \begin_layout Itemize
5824 The items can have any length.
5826 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5827 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5834 \begin_layout Itemize
5839 environment inside another
5843 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5847 \begin_layout Itemize
5848 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5851 \begin_layout Itemize
5853 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5856 \begin_layout Itemize
5858 \begin_inset space ~
5862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5864 reference "sec:Nesting"
5868 for a full explanation of nesting.
5872 \begin_layout Standard
5873 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5882 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5885 \begin_layout Standard
5886 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5887 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5890 \begin_layout Itemize
5891 The label for the first level
5895 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5899 \begin_layout Itemize
5900 The label for the second level is a dash.
5904 \begin_layout Itemize
5905 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5909 \begin_layout Itemize
5910 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5914 \begin_layout Itemize
5915 Back out to the third level.
5919 \begin_layout Itemize
5920 Back to the second level.
5924 \begin_layout Itemize
5925 Back to the outermost level.
5928 \begin_layout Standard
5929 These are the default labels for an
5934 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5936 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5939 dialog in the submenu
5944 \begin_inset Index idx
5947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5953 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5957 \begin_layout Standard
5958 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5959 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5961 \begin_inset space ~
5965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5967 reference "sec:Nesting"
5974 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5976 \begin_inset Index idx
5979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5988 name "sec:Enumerate"
5995 \begin_layout Standard
6000 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6001 It has these properties:
6004 \begin_layout Enumerate
6005 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6009 \begin_layout Enumerate
6010 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6014 \begin_layout Enumerate
6016 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6019 \begin_layout Enumerate
6024 environment resets the counter to one.
6027 \begin_layout Enumerate
6040 \begin_layout Enumerate
6041 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6042 Items can have any length.
6045 \begin_layout Enumerate
6046 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6049 \begin_layout Enumerate
6050 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6053 \begin_layout Enumerate
6054 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6058 \begin_layout Standard
6067 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6069 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6070 labels the four different levels in an
6077 \begin_layout Enumerate
6078 The first level of an
6082 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6086 \begin_layout Enumerate
6087 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6091 \begin_layout Enumerate
6092 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6096 \begin_layout Enumerate
6097 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6100 \begin_layout Enumerate
6101 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6106 \begin_layout Enumerate
6107 Back to the third level
6111 \begin_layout Enumerate
6112 Back to the second level.
6116 \begin_layout Enumerate
6117 Back to the outermost level.
6120 \begin_layout Standard
6121 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6125 environment, see section
6126 \begin_inset space ~
6130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6132 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6137 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6141 \begin_layout Standard
6142 There is more to nesting
6146 environments than we've stated here.
6147 You should read section
6148 \begin_inset space ~
6152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6154 reference "sec:Nesting"
6158 to learn more about nesting.
6161 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6163 \begin_inset Index idx
6166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6175 \begin_layout Standard
6176 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6180 list has no fixed label.
6181 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6190 of the first line as the label.
6194 \begin_layout Description
6195 Example: This is an example of the
6202 \begin_layout Standard
6204 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6208 \begin_layout Standard
6210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6217 it is meant that the first usage of the
6221 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6223 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6231 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6236 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6237 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6239 \begin_inset space ~
6245 \begin_inset space ~
6249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6251 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6255 for more information.) Here is an example:
6258 \begin_layout Description
6260 \begin_inset space ~
6263 Example: This one shows how to use a
6266 \begin_inset space ~
6278 \begin_layout Description
6279 Usage: You should use the
6283 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6284 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6286 It's not a good idea to use a
6290 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6291 You're better off using
6303 paragraphs into them.
6306 \begin_layout Description
6307 Nesting: You can nest
6311 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6315 \begin_layout Standard
6316 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6317 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6318 them from the first line.
6321 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6323 \begin_inset Index idx
6326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6335 \begin_layout Standard
6340 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6341 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6345 \begin_layout Standard
6354 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6356 Here are its properties:
6359 \begin_layout Labeling
6360 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6362 \begin_inset space ~
6365 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6374 of each line as the item label.
6379 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6380 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6381 space as described above.
6384 \begin_layout Labeling
6385 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6386 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6387 uses different margins for the item label and the
6388 body of the item text.
6389 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6390 label width plus a little extra space.
6394 \begin_layout Labeling
6395 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6397 \begin_inset space ~
6400 width \SpecialChar LyX
6401 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6402 If the label width is larger, the label
6403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6410 into the first line.
6411 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6412 margin of the rest of the item text.
6415 \begin_layout Labeling
6416 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6418 \begin_inset space ~
6421 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6426 environment has the same left margin.
6427 \begin_inset Newline newline
6430 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6433 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6435 \begin_inset space ~
6440 dialog (toolbar button
6443 arg "layout-paragraph"
6450 \begin_inset space ~
6455 determines the default label width.
6456 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6465 multiple times instead.
6466 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6476 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6479 \begin_inset space ~
6484 every time you alter a label in a
6489 \begin_inset Newline newline
6492 The predefined default width is the length of
6493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6501 \begin_inset space ~
6507 \begin_layout Standard
6512 list the same way as the
6516 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6522 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6526 \begin_layout Standard
6531 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6532 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6534 \begin_inset space ~
6538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6540 reference "sec:Nesting"
6544 to learn about nesting.
6547 \begin_layout Standard
6548 There is yet another feature of the
6552 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6553 left-justifies the item labels by
6555 You can use additional
6559 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6560 justifies the item label.
6565 are documented in section
6566 \begin_inset space ~
6570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6572 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6577 Here are some examples:
6580 \begin_layout Labeling
6581 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6582 Left The default for
6589 \begin_layout Labeling
6590 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6591 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6598 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6601 \begin_layout Labeling
6602 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6603 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6607 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6614 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6617 \begin_layout Subsection
6619 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6621 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6626 \begin_inset Index idx
6629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6638 \begin_layout Standard
6639 The features described in this section require that the module
6641 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6643 is loaded in the document settings.
6644 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6650 \begin_inset Index idx
6653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6655 -packages ! enumitem
6663 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6664 Custom Enumerate Lists
6665 \begin_inset Index idx
6668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6669 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6677 \begin_layout Standard
6679 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6682 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6685 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6686 There you add the command
6689 \begin_layout Standard
6697 \begin_layout Standard
6709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6710 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6711 Code, look at section
6712 \begin_inset space ~
6716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6718 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6731 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6738 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6739 For capital Roman numerals replace
6751 in the command above.
6752 For Arabic numerals use
6760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6767 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6782 \begin_layout Standard
6784 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6792 You can only number 26
6793 \begin_inset space ~
6796 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6804 \begin_layout Standard
6805 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6806 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6809 \begin_layout Standard
6810 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6813 \begin_layout Enumerate
6814 \begin_inset Argument 1
6817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6843 \begin_layout Enumerate
6844 \begin_inset Argument 1
6847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6870 \begin_layout Enumerate
6875 \begin_layout Enumerate
6876 \begin_inset Argument 1
6879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6903 \begin_layout Enumerate
6904 \begin_inset Argument 1
6907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6933 \begin_layout Standard
6934 For this list these commands were used:
6937 \begin_layout Standard
6948 \begin_inset Newline newline
6956 \begin_inset Newline newline
6964 \begin_inset Newline newline
6974 \begin_layout Standard
6981 makes the label emphasized and
6990 \begin_layout Standard
6991 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6999 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7000 lists until you change the definition.
7008 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7010 \begin_inset Index idx
7013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7014 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7022 \begin_layout Standard
7023 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7026 \begin_layout Enumerate
7027 \begin_inset Argument 1
7030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7049 \begin_inset Note Note
7052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7053 goes back to default numbering
7061 \begin_layout Enumerate
7065 \begin_layout Standard
7069 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7073 \begin_layout Standard
7074 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7079 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7080 to indicate that it is a resumed
7081 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7082 , but in the output.
7085 \begin_layout Standard
7086 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7094 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7103 \begin_layout Standard
7104 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7106 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7107 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7108 of a normal enumeration.
7109 There, insert the command
7112 \begin_layout Standard
7118 \begin_layout Standard
7123 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7127 \begin_layout Enumerate
7131 \begin_layout Enumerate
7135 \begin_layout Standard
7136 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7139 \begin_layout Enumerate
7140 \begin_inset Argument 1
7143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7159 This enumeration starts at 4
7162 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7164 \begin_inset Index idx
7167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7176 \begin_layout Standard
7177 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7179 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7182 \begin_layout Itemize
7186 \begin_layout Itemize
7187 with standard spacing
7190 \begin_layout Standard
7191 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7193 Add there the command
7197 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7200 \begin_layout Itemize
7201 \begin_inset Argument 1
7204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7223 \begin_layout Itemize
7227 \begin_layout Itemize
7231 \begin_layout Standard
7232 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7239 \begin_inset Index idx
7242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7244 -packages ! enumitem
7250 For more information see its documentation,
7251 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7260 \begin_layout Standard
7261 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7263 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7264 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7265 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7268 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7271 \begin_layout Enumerate
7272 \begin_inset Argument 1
7275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7283 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7296 \begin_layout Enumerate
7297 with negative indentation
7300 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7301 Further Customization
7302 \begin_inset Index idx
7305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7306 Lists ! Customization
7314 \begin_layout Standard
7315 You can also change the style of description lists.
7319 \begin_layout Standard
7325 \begin_layout Standard
7326 changes the description label font, the command
7329 \begin_layout Standard
7335 \begin_layout Standard
7336 sets the list style.
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 An example where the command
7343 \begin_layout Standard
7348 itshape, style=nextline
7351 \begin_layout Standard
7355 \begin_layout Description
7357 \begin_inset space ~
7361 \begin_inset Argument 1
7364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7370 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7372 itshape, style=nextline
7382 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7383 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7387 \begin_layout Description
7389 \begin_inset space ~
7392 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7393 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7394 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7397 \begin_layout Standard
7398 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7404 \begin_inset Index idx
7407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7409 -packages ! enumitem
7415 For more information see its documentation
7416 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7425 \begin_layout Subsection
7427 \begin_inset Index idx
7430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7439 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7441 \begin_inset space ~
7444 Address: An Overview
7447 \begin_layout Standard
7448 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7449 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7457 \begin_inset space ~
7463 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7464 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7465 gags on the document.
7466 In contrast, you can use the
7473 \begin_inset space ~
7478 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7479 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7483 \begin_layout Standard
7484 Of course, you're not limited to using
7491 \begin_inset space ~
7500 \begin_inset space ~
7505 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7506 some European academic papers.
7509 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7511 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7513 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7520 \begin_layout Standard
7525 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7526 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7530 \begin_inset space ~
7535 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7536 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7537 Here's an example of each:
7540 \begin_layout Right Address
7542 \begin_inset Newline newline
7546 \begin_inset Newline newline
7550 \begin_inset Newline newline
7553 When is it? What is today?
7556 \begin_layout Standard
7560 \begin_inset space ~
7566 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7568 the largest block of text on a single line.
7569 Here's an example of the
7576 \begin_layout Address
7578 \begin_inset Newline newline
7581 Where do I send this
7582 \begin_inset Newline newline
7585 Your post office and country
7588 \begin_layout Standard
7589 As you can see, both
7596 \begin_inset space ~
7601 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7606 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7607 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7613 This makes sense, since
7621 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7622 Thus, you have to use
7629 arg "newline-insert newline"
7634 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7635 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7637 \begin_inset space ~
7641 \begin_inset space ~
7646 ) to start a new line in an
7653 \begin_inset space ~
7661 \begin_layout Subsection
7665 \begin_layout Standard
7666 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7667 or list of references.
7669 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7672 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7674 \begin_inset Index idx
7677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7686 \begin_layout Standard
7691 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7692 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7693 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7694 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7708 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7709 The book document classes ignores the
7713 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7717 in a letter document class.
7720 \begin_layout Standard
7725 environment does several things for you.
7726 First, it puts the centered label
7727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7735 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7737 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7738 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7739 the subsequent text.
7740 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7742 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7746 \begin_layout Standard
7747 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7751 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7752 The new paragraph will still be in the
7757 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7758 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7761 \begin_layout Standard
7762 \begin_inset Float figure
7767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7769 \begin_inset Graphics
7770 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7778 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7781 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7783 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7804 \begin_layout Standard
7805 We would love to demonstrate the
7809 environment, but since this document is in the
7810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7817 class, we can't do this.
7818 We inserted it therefore as figure
7819 \begin_inset space ~
7823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7825 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7830 If you have never heard of an
7831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7838 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7841 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7843 \begin_inset Index idx
7846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7853 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7855 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7862 \begin_layout Standard
7867 environment is used to list references.
7868 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7869 only use it at the end of the document.
7881 \begin_layout Standard
7882 When you first open a
7886 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7887 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7903 depending on the document class.
7904 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7905 Each paragraph of the
7909 environment is a bibliography entry.
7914 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7915 Each new paragraph is still in the
7922 \begin_layout Standard
7923 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7924 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7926 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7928 handling, have a look at section
7929 \begin_inset space ~
7933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7935 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7942 \begin_layout Subsection
7943 Special Environments
7946 \begin_layout Standard
7948 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7949 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7952 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7957 \begin_inset Index idx
7960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7968 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7970 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7977 \begin_layout Standard
7983 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7985 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7990 key as a fixed whitespace.
7994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8007 \begin_inset space ~
8012 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8030 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8033 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8036 arg "newline-insert newline"
8053 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8054 So, when you finish using the
8059 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8060 Also, you can nest the
8065 environment inside of others.
8068 \begin_layout Standard
8069 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8072 \begin_layout Itemize
8076 arg "newline-insert newline"
8079 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8080 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8084 \begin_inset space \space{}
8094 arg "newline-insert newline"
8100 \begin_layout Itemize
8104 arg "newline-insert newline"
8114 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8120 \begin_layout Itemize
8121 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8122 You must put at least one
8126 in any line you want blank.
8127 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8131 \begin_layout Itemize
8132 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8136 since that will insert
8141 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8144 arg "self-insert \""
8150 \begin_layout Standard
8154 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8158 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8162 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8166 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8170 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8171 printf("Hello World!
8176 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8180 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8184 \begin_layout Standard
8185 This is just the standard
8186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8197 \begin_layout Standard
8203 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8205 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8206 as if you used a typewriter.
8207 \begin_inset Index idx
8210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8211 Paragraph environments|)
8216 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8219 Program Code Listings
8224 \begin_inset space ~
8232 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8236 \begin_inset Index idx
8239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8248 \begin_layout Standard
8253 environment is similar to the
8258 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8259 computer console text.
8264 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8278 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8279 you can have empty lines.
8292 \begin_layout Itemize
8293 have a certain language and a text style
8296 \begin_layout Itemize
8297 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8298 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8299 and \SpecialChar TeX
8303 \begin_layout Standard
8304 Because of these properties
8308 works like a typewriter.
8312 \begin_layout Verbatim
8316 \begin_layout Verbatim
8319 The following 2 lines are empty:
8322 \begin_layout Verbatim
8326 \begin_layout Verbatim
8330 \begin_layout Verbatim
8331 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8336 \begin_layout Standard
8341 environment is identical to
8345 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8346 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8353 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8357 \begin_layout Section
8358 Nesting Environments
8359 \begin_inset Index idx
8362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8363 Nesting ! Environments
8369 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8378 \begin_layout Subsection
8382 \begin_layout Standard
8384 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8386 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8388 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8390 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8402 \begin_layout Enumerate
8406 \begin_layout Enumerate
8411 \begin_layout Enumerate
8415 \begin_layout Enumerate
8420 \begin_layout Enumerate
8424 \begin_layout Standard
8425 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8426 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8428 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8430 \begin_inset space ~
8434 \begin_inset space ~
8442 \begin_inset space ~
8446 \begin_inset space ~
8451 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8453 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8456 arg "depth-increment"
8462 arg "depth-decrement"
8476 arg "depth-increment"
8482 arg "depth-decrement"
8486 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8487 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8491 \begin_layout Standard
8492 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8493 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8494 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8495 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8496 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8499 \begin_layout Standard
8500 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8502 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8504 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8507 \begin_layout Subsection
8508 What You Can and Can't Nest
8511 \begin_layout Standard
8512 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8513 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8516 \begin_layout Standard
8517 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8518 than a simple yes or no.
8519 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8522 \begin_layout Itemize
8523 Completely unnestable
8526 \begin_layout Itemize
8527 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8531 \begin_layout Itemize
8532 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8536 \begin_layout Standard
8537 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8538 environments have them:
8541 \begin_layout Description
8542 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8543 Can't nest into them.
8547 \begin_layout Itemize
8553 \begin_layout Itemize
8559 \begin_layout Itemize
8565 \begin_layout Itemize
8571 \begin_layout Itemize
8578 \begin_layout Description
8580 \begin_inset space ~
8583 Nestable You can nest them.
8584 You can nest other things into them.
8588 \begin_layout Itemize
8594 \begin_layout Itemize
8600 \begin_layout Itemize
8606 \begin_layout Itemize
8612 \begin_layout Itemize
8618 \begin_layout Itemize
8624 \begin_layout Itemize
8630 \begin_layout Itemize
8637 \begin_layout Itemize
8643 \begin_layout Itemize
8650 \begin_layout Description
8651 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8652 You can't nest anything into them.
8656 \begin_layout Itemize
8662 \begin_layout Itemize
8668 \begin_layout Itemize
8674 \begin_layout Itemize
8680 \begin_layout Itemize
8686 \begin_layout Itemize
8692 \begin_layout Itemize
8698 \begin_layout Itemize
8704 \begin_layout Itemize
8710 \begin_layout Itemize
8716 \begin_layout Itemize
8722 \begin_layout Itemize
8728 \begin_layout Itemize
8734 \begin_layout Itemize
8738 \begin_inset space ~
8744 \begin_layout Itemize
8751 \begin_layout Standard
8752 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8760 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8770 \begin_inset space ~
8773 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8774 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8775 nested section headings violate this.
8783 \begin_layout Subsection
8784 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8785 \begin_inset Index idx
8788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8789 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8797 \begin_layout Standard
8798 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8799 affected by nesting anyhow.
8803 \begin_layout Itemize
8807 \begin_layout Itemize
8811 \begin_layout Itemize
8815 \begin_layout Standard
8817 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8825 Figures and tables in
8829 are not affected by this.
8834 Have a look at section
8835 \begin_inset space ~
8839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8841 reference "sec:Floats"
8845 for more information about
8852 \begin_layout Standard
8854 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8855 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8859 \begin_layout Standard
8860 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8868 of its own, it behaves just like a
8869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8876 paragraph environment.
8877 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8881 \begin_layout Standard
8882 Here's an example with a table:
8885 \begin_layout Enumerate
8890 \begin_layout Enumerate
8891 This is (a) and it's nested.
8895 \begin_layout Standard
8896 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8902 \begin_layout Standard
8904 \begin_inset Tabular
8905 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8906 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8907 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8908 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8992 \begin_layout Standard
8993 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9000 \begin_layout Enumerate
9002 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9006 \begin_layout Enumerate
9010 \begin_layout Standard
9011 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9014 \begin_layout Enumerate
9019 \begin_layout Enumerate
9020 This is (a) and it's nested.
9024 \begin_layout Standard
9025 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9031 \begin_layout Standard
9033 \begin_inset Tabular
9034 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9035 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9036 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9037 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9121 \begin_layout Standard
9122 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9128 \begin_layout Enumerate
9135 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9138 \begin_layout Enumerate
9142 \begin_layout Standard
9143 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9147 \begin_layout Standard
9148 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9151 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9154 \begin_layout Enumerate
9159 \begin_layout Enumerate
9160 This is (a) and it's nested.
9163 \begin_layout Standard
9164 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9170 \begin_layout Standard
9172 \begin_inset Tabular
9173 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9174 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9175 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9176 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9261 \begin_layout Standard
9262 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9268 \begin_layout Enumerate
9270 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9277 \begin_layout Enumerate
9281 \begin_layout Standard
9282 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9288 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9289 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9293 \begin_layout Subsection
9294 Usage and General Features
9297 \begin_layout Standard
9298 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9299 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9308 is the innermost possible depth.
9309 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9312 \begin_layout Enumerate
9313 level #1 – outermost
9317 \begin_layout Enumerate
9322 \begin_layout Enumerate
9327 \begin_layout Enumerate
9332 \begin_layout Itemize
9337 \begin_layout Itemize
9346 \begin_layout Standard
9347 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9348 both of them in the example.
9349 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9359 For example, if we tried to nest another
9364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9371 , we would get errors.
9374 \begin_layout Subsection
9376 \begin_inset Index idx
9379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9388 \begin_layout Standard
9389 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9390 We have several examples of nested environments.
9391 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9395 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9396 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9399 \begin_layout Labeling
9400 \labelwidthstring MMM
9401 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9410 \begin_layout Labeling
9411 \labelwidthstring MMM
9412 #2-a This is level #2.
9413 We created it by using
9416 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9422 arg "depth-increment"
9429 \begin_layout Labeling
9430 \labelwidthstring MMM
9431 #3-a This is level #3.
9432 This time, we just enter
9439 arg "depth-increment"
9443 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9447 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9453 arg "depth-increment"
9460 \begin_layout Standard
9465 environment, nested inside of
9466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9474 So, it's at level #4.
9475 We did this by entering
9478 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9484 arg "depth-increment"
9487 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9492 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9508 \begin_layout Standard
9513 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9516 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9522 \begin_layout Labeling
9523 \labelwidthstring MMM
9524 #4-a This is level #4.
9528 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9531 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9536 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9540 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9545 keep nesting things inside
9546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9557 \begin_layout Labeling
9558 \labelwidthstring MMM
9559 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9564 \begin_layout Labeling
9565 \labelwidthstring MMM
9566 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9567 and this is level #6.
9568 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9572 \begin_layout Labeling
9573 \labelwidthstring MMM
9574 #5-b Back to level #5.
9578 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9584 arg "depth-decrement"
9591 \begin_layout Labeling
9592 \labelwidthstring MMM
9596 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9602 arg "depth-decrement"
9605 , we're back at level #4.
9609 \begin_layout Labeling
9610 \labelwidthstring MMM
9611 #3-b Back to level #3.
9612 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9616 \begin_layout Labeling
9617 \labelwidthstring MMM
9618 #2-b Back to level #2.
9623 \begin_layout Labeling
9624 \labelwidthstring MMM
9625 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9626 After this sentence, we will enter
9630 and change the paragraph environment back to
9637 \begin_layout Standard
9638 We could have also used the
9654 environment in place of the
9659 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9662 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9663 Example 2: Inheritance
9666 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9667 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9670 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9679 arg "depth-increment"
9683 \begin_inset Newline newline
9686 which, we will change to the
9694 \begin_layout Enumerate
9699 environment, at level #2.
9702 \begin_layout Enumerate
9703 Notice how the nested
9707 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9711 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9715 \begin_layout Standard
9716 We ended this example by entering
9721 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9725 and reset the nesting depth by using
9728 arg "depth-decrement"
9734 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9735 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9744 \begin_inset Argument 1
9747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9748 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9756 \begin_layout Enumerate
9757 This is level #1, in an
9761 paragraph environment.
9762 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9766 \begin_layout Enumerate
9771 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9777 arg "depth-increment"
9781 Now, what happens if we nest an
9785 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9786 label be? An asterisk?
9790 \begin_layout Itemize
9800 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9801 So, its label is a bullet.
9802 (We got here by using
9805 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9811 arg "depth-increment"
9814 , then changing the environment to
9822 \begin_layout Itemize
9823 Here's level #4, produced using
9826 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9832 arg "depth-increment"
9836 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9841 \begin_layout Enumerate
9844 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9849 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9853 , because we are in the
9861 environment (that is, it is an
9876 \begin_layout Enumerate
9881 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9882 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9886 \begin_layout Enumerate
9887 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9890 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9893 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9896 \begin_layout Enumerate
9900 arg "depth-decrement"
9903 to decrease the depth after the next
9906 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9913 \begin_layout Enumerate
9915 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9920 \begin_layout Enumerate
9922 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9923 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9927 \begin_layout Enumerate
9928 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9937 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9942 reset the counter for the label.
9946 \begin_layout Enumerate
9950 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9956 arg "depth-decrement"
9959 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9960 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9961 into the twofold-nested
9969 \begin_layout Enumerate
9970 The same thing happens if we do another
9973 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9979 arg "depth-decrement"
9982 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9985 \begin_layout Standard
9986 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9991 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10002 The number of other
10006 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10013 The same rule applies for the
10017 environment, as well.
10020 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10021 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10024 \begin_layout Enumerate
10025 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10026 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10027 the same detail with how we did it.
10036 \begin_layout Standard
10044 arg "depth-increment"
10051 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10052 the example in parentheses someplace.
10053 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10054 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10055 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10059 \begin_layout Enumerate
10064 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10068 \begin_layout Verse
10069 Now we will add verse.
10070 \begin_inset Newline newline
10073 It will get much worse.
10074 \begin_inset Newline newline
10084 arg "depth-increment"
10094 \begin_layout Verse
10095 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10096 \begin_inset Newline newline
10099 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10100 \begin_inset Newline newline
10106 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10114 \begin_layout Verse
10115 Here comes a table:
10119 \begin_layout Standard
10120 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10126 \begin_layout Standard
10128 \begin_inset Tabular
10129 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10130 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10131 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10132 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10217 \begin_layout Verse
10221 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10231 arg "depth-increment"
10237 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10243 \begin_inset Newline newline
10251 arg "depth-decrement"
10258 \begin_layout Enumerate
10263 : level #1) This is another item.
10264 Note that selecting a
10268 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10269 3 times to put the table inside the
10277 \begin_layout Quotation
10278 We're now ending the
10282 list and changing to
10287 We're still at level #1.
10288 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10289 The next set of paragraphs is a
10290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10297 We will nest both the
10304 \begin_inset space ~
10309 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10313 for the letter body.
10317 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10320 to preserve the depth.
10321 Remember that you need to use
10324 arg "newline-insert newline"
10327 to create multiple lines inside the
10334 \begin_inset space ~
10344 \begin_layout Right Address
10346 \begin_inset Newline newline
10349 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10350 \begin_inset Newline newline
10356 \begin_layout Address
10358 \begin_inset space ~
10364 \begin_layout Quotation
10365 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10366 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10369 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10370 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10371 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10372 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10373 as soon as possible.
10374 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10377 \begin_layout Quotation
10378 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10379 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10380 with your order, along with payment.
10383 \begin_layout Quotation
10384 We thank you again for your patience.
10387 \begin_layout Address
10389 \begin_inset Newline newline
10396 \begin_layout Quotation
10397 That ends that example!
10400 \begin_layout Standard
10401 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10402 gives you a lot of power with just
10404 We could have easily nested an
10425 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10428 \begin_layout Subsection
10430 \begin_inset Index idx
10433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10434 Nesting ! Separation
10440 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10442 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10449 \begin_layout Standard
10450 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10452 For example you need two different enumerations:
10455 \begin_layout Enumerate
10460 \begin_layout Enumerate
10465 \begin_layout Enumerate
10469 \begin_layout Standard
10470 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10476 \begin_layout Itemize
10482 \begin_layout Standard
10483 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10489 \begin_layout Enumerate
10493 \begin_layout Enumerate
10497 \begin_layout Enumerate
10501 \begin_layout Standard
10502 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10503 list item and use the menu
10505 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10506 Start New Environment
10509 This inserts a plain separator (red line in LyX) and behind it the new
10511 Alternatively set the cursor at the end of a list item and press
10514 arg "paragraph-break"
10518 This inserts a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
10519 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10520 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10521 One can change the separator type by right-clicking on it.
10524 \begin_layout Standard
10525 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10528 arg "paragraph-break"
10531 in a Standard environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10534 \begin_layout Section
10535 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10536 \begin_inset Index idx
10539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10548 \begin_layout Standard
10549 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10550 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10552 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10553 be broken at the end of a line.
10554 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10558 \begin_layout Subsection
10560 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10562 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10567 \begin_inset Index idx
10570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10579 \begin_layout Standard
10580 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10581 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10582 ) not to break the line at
10584 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10587 \begin_layout Quote
10588 Further documentation is given in section
10589 \begin_inset Newline newline
10593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10595 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10603 \begin_layout Standard
10604 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10617 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10619 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10628 A protected space is set with
10630 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10631 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10633 \begin_inset space ~
10641 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10647 \begin_layout Subsection
10649 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10651 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10656 \begin_inset Index idx
10659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10660 Spacing ! Horizontal
10668 \begin_layout Standard
10669 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10671 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10672 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10676 The length units are listed in Appendix
10677 \begin_inset space ~
10681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10683 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10690 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10692 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10694 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10699 \begin_inset Index idx
10702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10703 Spaces ! Inter-word
10711 \begin_layout Standard
10712 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10713 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10714 at the ends of sentences.
10715 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10716 automatically takes care about this.
10717 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10718 followed by a period; see section
10719 \begin_inset space ~
10723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10725 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10730 To insert a normal space, select
10732 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10733 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10735 \begin_inset space ~
10743 arg "space-insert normal"
10749 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10751 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10753 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10758 \begin_inset Index idx
10761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10770 \begin_layout Standard
10772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10779 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10788 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10789 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10790 inside abbreviations:
10793 \begin_layout Quote
10795 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10799 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10802 \begin_layout Standard
10803 or between values and units.
10804 Compare for example this:
10805 \begin_inset Newline newline
10809 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10813 \begin_inset Newline newline
10816 10 kg (normal space
10819 \begin_layout Standard
10820 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10822 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10823 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10825 \begin_inset space ~
10833 arg "space-insert thin"
10839 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10843 \begin_layout Standard
10844 You can also insert the following space types:
10847 \begin_layout Description
10849 \begin_inset space ~
10853 \begin_inset space ~
10856 space A line with a
10857 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10861 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10865 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10868 negative thin space between the arrows.
10871 \begin_layout Description
10873 \begin_inset space ~
10877 \begin_inset space ~
10880 space A line with a
10881 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10885 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10889 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10892 negative medium space between the arrows.
10895 \begin_layout Description
10897 \begin_inset space ~
10901 \begin_inset space ~
10904 space A line with a
10905 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10909 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10913 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10916 negative thick space between the arrows.
10919 \begin_layout Description
10921 \begin_inset space ~
10925 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10929 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10933 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10937 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10941 \begin_inset space ~
10945 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10948 em) space between the arrows.
10951 \begin_layout Description
10953 \begin_inset space ~
10957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10961 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10965 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10969 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10973 \begin_inset space ~
10977 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10980 em) space between the arrows.
10983 \begin_layout Description
10985 \begin_inset space ~
10989 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10993 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10997 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11001 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11005 \begin_inset space ~
11009 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11012 em) space between the arrows.
11015 \begin_layout Description
11017 \begin_inset space ~
11021 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11025 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11030 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11034 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11037 cm space between the arrows.
11040 \begin_layout Standard
11042 \begin_inset space ~
11046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11048 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11052 lists the different space sizes.
11055 \begin_layout Standard
11056 \begin_inset Float table
11061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11062 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11065 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11067 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11071 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11081 \begin_inset Tabular
11082 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11083 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11125 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11149 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11173 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11197 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11201 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11229 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11268 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11281 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11296 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11309 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11324 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11337 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11358 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11360 \begin_inset Index idx
11363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11372 \begin_layout Standard
11373 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11374 feature for adding extra space
11375 in a uniform fashion.
11376 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11377 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11378 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11379 equally between themselves.
11382 \begin_layout Standard
11383 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11386 \begin_layout Quote
11388 This is on the left side
11389 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11392 This is on the right
11395 \begin_layout Quote
11398 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11402 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11408 \begin_layout Quote
11411 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11415 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11419 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11425 \begin_layout Standard
11426 That was an example in the
11432 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11436 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11440 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11443 is one in a standard paragraph.
11444 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11448 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11451 \begin_layout Standard
11452 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11455 \begin_inset space ~
11460 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11463 \begin_layout Standard
11465 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11469 \begin_inset space ~
11475 \begin_layout Standard
11477 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11481 \begin_inset space ~
11487 \begin_layout Standard
11489 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11493 \begin_inset space ~
11499 \begin_layout Standard
11501 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11505 \begin_inset space ~
11511 \begin_layout Standard
11513 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11517 \begin_inset space ~
11523 \begin_layout Standard
11525 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11529 \begin_inset space ~
11535 \begin_layout Standard
11536 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11544 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11548 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11550 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11551 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11555 option in the space dialog.
11563 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11565 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11567 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11572 \begin_inset Index idx
11575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11584 \begin_layout Standard
11585 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11586 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11589 \begin_layout Standard
11590 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11593 What is correct English?:
11594 \begin_inset Newline newline
11598 \begin_inset Newline newline
11602 \begin_inset space ~
11605 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11606 \begin_inset Newline newline
11610 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11621 \begin_inset Newline newline
11625 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11636 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11642 \begin_layout Standard
11644 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11649 \begin_inset space ~
11653 \begin_inset space ~
11657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11661 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11663 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11664 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11668 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11674 \begin_inset space ~
11678 \begin_inset space ~
11682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11685 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11694 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11695 That is why it is named
11696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11704 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11705 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11709 \begin_layout Subsection
11711 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11713 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11718 \begin_inset Index idx
11721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11730 \begin_layout Standard
11731 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11733 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11734 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11736 \begin_inset space ~
11742 There you find the following sizes:
11745 \begin_layout Standard
11758 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11759 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11764 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11766 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11767 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11769 \begin_inset space ~
11775 \begin_inset Index idx
11778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11779 Document ! Settings
11784 for the paragraph separation.
11785 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11796 \begin_layout Standard
11802 \begin_inset Index idx
11805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11811 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11812 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11817 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11818 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11827 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11836 s are described in section
11837 \begin_inset space ~
11841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11843 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11852 If there are several
11856 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11857 You can therefore use
11861 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11864 \begin_layout Standard
11869 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11870 \begin_inset space ~
11874 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11876 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11883 \begin_layout Standard
11884 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11894 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11895 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11907 \begin_layout Subsection
11908 Paragraph Alignment
11909 \begin_inset Index idx
11912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11913 Paragraph ! Alignment
11921 \begin_layout Standard
11922 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11924 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11927 dialog (toolbar button
11930 arg "layout-paragraph"
11934 There are five possibilities:
11937 \begin_layout Itemize
11945 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11951 \begin_layout Itemize
11959 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11965 \begin_layout Itemize
11973 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11979 \begin_layout Itemize
11987 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11993 \begin_layout Itemize
12001 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12007 \begin_layout Standard
12008 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12009 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12010 the left and right margins.
12011 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12014 \begin_layout Standard
12016 This paragraph is right aligned,
12019 \begin_layout Standard
12021 this one is centered,
12024 \begin_layout Standard
12026 this one is left aligned.
12029 \begin_layout Subsection
12031 \begin_inset Index idx
12034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12035 Page breaks ! Forced
12041 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12043 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12050 \begin_layout Standard
12051 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12052 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12053 force a page break where you want one.
12054 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12055 is good at page breaking.
12056 Only if you use a lot of
12060 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12061 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12064 \begin_layout Standard
12065 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12066 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12070 have to change the page breaking.
12073 \begin_layout Standard
12074 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12076 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12078 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12079 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12081 \begin_inset space ~
12087 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12089 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12090 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12092 \begin_inset space ~
12097 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12099 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12100 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12103 \begin_layout Standard
12104 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12105 at the top of a page.
12106 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12108 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12109 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12110 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12114 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12118 to learn more about
12125 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12129 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12134 \begin_inset Index idx
12137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12138 Page breaks ! Clear
12146 \begin_layout Standard
12147 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12148 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12149 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12150 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12151 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12154 \begin_layout Standard
12155 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12157 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12158 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12160 \begin_inset space ~
12166 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12168 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12169 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12171 \begin_inset space ~
12175 \begin_inset space ~
12180 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12181 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12184 \begin_layout Subsection
12186 \begin_inset Index idx
12189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12196 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12198 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12205 \begin_layout Standard
12206 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12208 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12210 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12211 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12213 \begin_inset space ~
12217 \begin_inset space ~
12225 arg "newline-insert newline"
12229 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12231 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12232 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12234 \begin_inset space ~
12238 \begin_inset space ~
12246 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12249 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12251 This is useful to avoid
12252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12259 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12262 \begin_layout Standard
12263 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12264 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12266 very good at line breaking.
12267 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
12268 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12269 \begin_inset space ~
12273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12275 reference "sec:Quote"
12280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12282 reference "sec:Verse"
12287 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12289 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12296 \begin_layout Subsection
12298 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12300 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12305 \begin_inset Index idx
12308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12317 \begin_layout Standard
12319 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12330 \begin_layout Standard
12334 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12335 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12337 \begin_inset space ~
12342 you can insert horizontal lines.
12343 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12344 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12345 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12348 \begin_layout Standard
12350 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12361 \begin_layout Section
12362 Characters and Symbols
12365 \begin_layout Standard
12366 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12367 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12368 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12370 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12376 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12380 for information on how this is done.
12383 \begin_layout Standard
12384 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12389 dialog via the menu
12391 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12392 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12398 \begin_layout Standard
12399 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12407 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12408 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12410 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12418 \begin_layout Section
12419 Fonts and Text Styles
12420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12422 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12429 \begin_layout Subsection
12431 \begin_inset Index idx
12434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12443 \begin_layout Standard
12444 There are two types of fonts:
12447 \begin_layout Description
12449 \begin_inset space ~
12453 \begin_inset Index idx
12456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12462 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12463 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12467 characters) in the font.
12468 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12469 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12470 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12471 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12472 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12473 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12474 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12475 \begin_inset Newline newline
12478 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12479 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12480 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12481 sizes than at small ones.
12482 \begin_inset Newline newline
12496 \begin_inset space ~
12504 \begin_layout Description
12506 \begin_inset space ~
12510 \begin_inset Index idx
12513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12519 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12520 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12521 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12522 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12523 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12524 image manipulation program.
12525 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12526 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12527 \begin_inset space ~
12530 pixels high up to 34
12531 \begin_inset space ~
12534 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12535 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12536 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12538 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12539 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12540 \begin_inset Newline newline
12543 Bitmap fonts are named
12546 \begin_inset space ~
12551 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12554 \begin_layout Standard
12555 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12556 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12557 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12558 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12559 use scalable fonts.
12562 \begin_layout Standard
12563 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12566 \begin_layout Standard
12567 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12568 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12569 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12570 font to emphasize text, you use an
12571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12579 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12581 In \SpecialChar LyX
12582 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12586 \begin_layout Subsection
12589 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12591 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12598 \begin_layout Standard
12599 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12600 used its own fonts.
12601 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12602 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12605 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12606 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12607 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12608 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12609 to a word processor.
12610 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12611 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12612 files are very portable across
12613 different machines.
12614 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12615 has increased a lot
12616 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12619 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12621 \begin_inset space ~
12625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12627 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12632 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12633 code in the document
12634 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12637 \begin_layout Standard
12638 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12639 engines that are also able directly
12640 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12642 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12644 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12646 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12647 that is installed on your system.
12648 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12651 \begin_layout Standard
12652 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12660 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12661 es; so you might have to experiment.
12669 \begin_layout Subsection
12670 Document Font and Font size
12671 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12673 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12678 \begin_inset Index idx
12681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12688 \begin_inset Index idx
12691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12700 \begin_layout Standard
12701 You can set the document fonts in the
12703 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12707 \begin_inset Index idx
12710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12711 Document ! Settings
12721 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12722 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12725 \begin_inset space ~
12734 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12736 \begin_inset space ~
12739 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12742 \begin_layout Standard
12747 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12748 This requires that you use
12760 as the output format, i.
12761 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12765 \begin_inset space \space{}
12768 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12769 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12770 installed (see section
12771 \begin_inset space ~
12775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12777 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12782 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12784 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12785 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12787 \begin_inset space ~
12790 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12791 cannot determine the family.
12792 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12793 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12796 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12799 \begin_layout Standard
12800 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12801 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12806 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12812 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12813 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12821 \begin_inset space ~
12827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12840 European Computer Modern
12843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12850 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12853 \begin_layout Standard
12862 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12863 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12868 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12871 \begin_inset space ~
12876 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12882 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12883 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12886 \begin_layout Itemize
12890 \begin_inset space ~
12895 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12908 \begin_inset space ~
12913 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12914 community in order to replace
12918 as the default font.
12919 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12920 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12923 \begin_inset space ~
12936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12937 One difference is improved kerning.
12945 \begin_layout Itemize
12949 \begin_inset space ~
12953 \begin_inset space ~
12958 fonts in (the rare) case that
12961 \begin_inset space ~
12966 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12981 Virtual means that it
12982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12993 -glyphs from other fonts.
12994 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13016 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13022 \begin_inset Index idx
13025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13027 -packages ! aeguill
13032 with the document preamble line
13033 \begin_inset Newline newline
13040 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13041 \begin_inset Newline newline
13046 will fix the guillemet problem.
13051 and that accented characters are not
13055 glyph, but built of
13059 characters, the accent and the letter.
13060 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13066 If you search for example for the French word
13067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13074 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13083 and not for the glyph
13084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13088 \begin_inset space ~
13092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13098 \begin_layout Itemize
13099 If you do not like the look of
13107 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13108 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13112 \begin_inset space ~
13118 \begin_inset space ~
13128 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13129 \begin_inset space ~
13132 serif and typewriter fonts,
13136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13137 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13144 \begin_inset space ~
13153 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13154 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13158 \begin_inset space \space{}
13166 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13170 \begin_inset space \space{}
13176 \begin_inset space ~
13184 \begin_inset space ~
13194 but you can also select your own.
13195 \begin_inset Newline newline
13198 The differences between roman,
13201 \begin_inset space ~
13210 fonts are explained in section
13211 \begin_inset space ~
13215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13217 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13222 \begin_inset Newline newline
13228 \begin_inset space ~
13233 was originally designed for newspapers.
13234 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13235 into the small newspaper columns.
13239 \begin_inset space ~
13244 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13247 \begin_layout Standard
13248 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13261 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13266 depends on the class you are using.
13267 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13270 \begin_layout Standard
13271 Note that the font size is the
13276 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13277 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13278 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13279 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13282 \begin_inset space ~
13288 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13289 \begin_inset space ~
13293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13295 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13302 \begin_layout Standard
13306 \begin_inset space ~
13311 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13313 \begin_inset space ~
13316 serif or typewriter.
13321 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13331 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13334 \begin_layout Standard
13339 LaTeX font encoding
13341 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13342 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13348 \begin_inset Index idx
13351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13353 -packages ! fontenc
13359 \begin_inset space ~
13363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13365 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13370 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13371 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13378 \begin_layout Standard
13379 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13381 Use Old Style Figures
13385 Use True Small Caps
13388 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13391 Use Old Style Figures
13393 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13395 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13400 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13403 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13407 Use True Small Caps
13409 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13410 of scaled capitals.
13411 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13412 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13415 \begin_layout Standard
13420 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13421 a font to display the script characters.
13425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13426 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13432 \begin_inset Index idx
13435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13442 So this has no effect for the document language
13456 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13460 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13468 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13473 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13474 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13476 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13478 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13481 dialog, see section
13482 \begin_inset space ~
13486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13488 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13500 \begin_layout Subsection
13504 \begin_layout Standard
13505 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13506 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13508 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13509 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13510 choose a math font in the dialog
13512 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13516 \begin_inset Index idx
13519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13520 Document ! Settings
13526 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13527 automatically selects a math font.
13528 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13529 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13538 \begin_inset space ~
13544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13549 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13550 document font is available.
13553 \begin_layout Standard
13554 Note that the math font will not be used for
13558 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13564 or by the insertion of the command
13571 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13572 \begin_inset space ~
13576 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13577 while the math characters do not.
13579 \begin_inset space ~
13582 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13585 \begin_inset space ~
13593 \begin_inset space ~
13598 in the document font settings.
13601 \begin_layout Standard
13602 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13603 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13604 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13605 font (in most cases
13606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13612 \begin_inset space ~
13618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13621 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13622 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13630 \begin_inset space ~
13636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13642 \begin_layout Subsection
13643 Using Different Character Styles
13644 \begin_inset Index idx
13647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13654 \begin_inset Index idx
13657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13666 \begin_layout Standard
13667 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13668 automatically changes the character style for certain
13669 paragraph environments.
13671 supports two character styles,
13680 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13684 \begin_layout Standard
13689 style, do one of the following:
13692 \begin_layout Itemize
13693 click on the toolbar button
13702 \begin_layout Itemize
13703 use the key binding
13712 \begin_layout Standard
13713 These commands are all toggles.
13718 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13721 \begin_layout Standard
13722 One typically uses the
13726 style for proper names.
13728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13735 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13743 \begin_layout Standard
13744 A more widely used character style is the
13749 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13756 \begin_layout Itemize
13757 clicking on the toolbar button
13766 \begin_layout Itemize
13767 using the keybindings
13776 \begin_layout Standard
13781 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13783 use a different font.
13786 \begin_layout Standard
13787 We've been using the
13791 style all over the place in this document.
13792 Here's one more example:
13795 \begin_layout Quotation
13798 Do not overuse character styles!
13801 \begin_layout Standard
13802 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13803 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13804 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13805 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13809 \begin_layout Standard
13810 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13818 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13820 \begin_inset space ~
13823 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13829 arg "dialog-show character"
13835 \begin_layout Subsection
13836 Fine-Tuning with the
13841 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13843 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13848 \begin_inset Index idx
13851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13860 \begin_layout Standard
13861 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13863 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13864 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13865 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13866 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13867 from ordinary dialog.
13870 \begin_layout Standard
13871 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13872 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13873 \begin_inset Newline newline
13876 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13877 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13880 \begin_layout Standard
13881 To use custom character styles, open the
13883 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13885 \begin_inset space ~
13888 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13891 dialog or press the toolbar button
13894 arg "dialog-show character"
13898 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13899 font property that you can choose.
13900 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13903 \begin_inset space ~
13908 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13913 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13914 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13915 environments all at once.
13918 \begin_layout Standard
13919 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13922 \begin_inset space ~
13934 \begin_layout Labeling
13935 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13949 The possible options are:
13953 \begin_layout Labeling
13954 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13959 This is the Roman font family.
13960 Normally a serif font.
13961 It's also the default family.
13971 \begin_layout Labeling
13972 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13976 \begin_inset space ~
13983 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13995 \begin_layout Labeling
13996 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14003 This is the Typewriter font family.
14009 arg "font-typewriter"
14018 \begin_layout Labeling
14019 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14024 This corresponds to the print weight.
14029 \begin_layout Labeling
14030 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14035 This is the Medium font series.
14036 It's also the default series.
14039 \begin_layout Labeling
14040 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14047 This is the Bold font series.
14060 \begin_layout Labeling
14061 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14066 As the name implies.
14071 \begin_layout Labeling
14072 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14077 This is the Upright font shape.
14078 It's also the default shape.
14081 \begin_layout Labeling
14082 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14096 s the Italic font shape
14102 \begin_layout Labeling
14103 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14110 This is the Slanted font shape
14112 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14113 , this is different from italic).
14116 \begin_layout Labeling
14117 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14121 \begin_inset space ~
14128 This is the Small caps font shape
14135 \begin_layout Labeling
14136 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14141 Alters the text color.
14142 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14146 \begin_inset space ~
14151 , which means that the document default color set in
14153 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14154 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14160 \begin_inset space ~
14165 is used, you can choose between
14242 \begin_inset Index idx
14245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14254 \begin_layout Labeling
14255 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14260 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14261 the language of the document.
14262 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14263 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14265 \begin_inset Newline newline
14268 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14270 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14271 When using the spell checking (see section
14272 \begin_inset space ~
14276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14278 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14282 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14285 \begin_layout Labeling
14286 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14291 Alters the size of the font.
14292 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14293 proportional to the document font size.
14294 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14295 the details, but a general description of what
14301 \begin_layout Labeling
14302 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14323 arg "font-size tiny"
14329 \begin_layout Labeling
14330 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14351 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14357 \begin_layout Labeling
14358 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14379 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14385 \begin_layout Labeling
14386 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14407 arg "font-size small"
14413 \begin_layout Labeling
14414 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14428 It's also the default size.
14432 arg "font-size normal"
14438 \begin_layout Labeling
14439 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14460 arg "font-size large"
14466 \begin_layout Labeling
14467 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14488 arg "font-size larger"
14494 \begin_layout Labeling
14495 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14516 arg "font-size largest"
14522 \begin_layout Labeling
14523 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14544 arg "font-size huge"
14550 \begin_layout Labeling
14551 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14572 arg "font-size giant"
14578 \begin_layout Labeling
14579 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14584 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14604 arg "font-size increase"
14610 \begin_layout Labeling
14611 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14616 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14636 arg "font-size decrease"
14643 \begin_layout Standard
14648 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14649 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14651 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14652 — use those instead.
14653 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14656 \begin_layout Labeling
14657 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14662 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14667 \begin_layout Labeling
14668 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14675 This is text with emphasize on
14678 This might seem like the same as
14682 , but it is actually a bit different.
14688 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14690 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14693 \begin_layout Labeling
14694 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14701 This is text with Underbar on.
14707 arg "font-underline"
14713 \begin_inset Newline newline
14718 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14719 when you could not change fonts.
14720 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14721 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14722 because some people
14726 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14729 \begin_layout Labeling
14730 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14734 \begin_inset space ~
14741 This is text with Double underbar on.
14747 arg "font-underunderline"
14751 \begin_inset Newline newline
14754 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14755 about double underbar.
14758 \begin_layout Labeling
14759 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14763 \begin_inset space ~
14770 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14776 arg "font-underwave"
14780 \begin_inset Newline newline
14783 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14784 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14787 \begin_layout Labeling
14788 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14795 This is text with Strikeout on.
14801 arg "font-strikeout"
14805 \begin_inset Newline newline
14808 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14809 changed in the meantime.
14812 \begin_layout Labeling
14813 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14820 This is text with Noun on.
14827 , this is a logical attribute.
14828 Normally it's equivalent to
14831 \begin_inset space ~
14840 \begin_layout Standard
14841 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14842 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14844 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14846 \begin_inset space ~
14849 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14855 arg "dialog-show character"
14858 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14859 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14862 arg "textstyle-apply"
14866 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14870 \begin_layout Standard
14871 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14878 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14879 (suppose you just set the shape to
14880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14898 \begin_inset space ~
14910 \begin_layout Standard
14911 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14919 \begin_inset space ~
14931 \begin_layout Itemize
14937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14944 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14962 \begin_inset Newline newline
14966 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14980 \begin_inset Note Note
14983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14984 For more on phantoms see section
14985 \begin_inset space ~
14989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14991 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15001 \begin_inset Newline newline
15007 \begin_layout Itemize
15012 fonts use characters with serifs.
15013 These are the small
15014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15021 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15022 The following example shows the difference:
15023 \begin_inset Newline newline
15027 \begin_inset Newline newline
15032 text without serifs
15035 \begin_inset Newline newline
15038 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15039 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15046 \begin_layout Itemize
15051 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15052 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15053 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15056 \begin_layout Standard
15057 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15064 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15065 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15068 \begin_inset space ~
15073 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15074 the property to be removed.
15075 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15076 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15077 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15095 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15096 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15104 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15108 \begin_inset space ~
15113 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15124 If you, for example, set
15125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15143 \begin_inset space ~
15148 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15157 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15160 \begin_layout Standard
15161 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15162 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15165 \begin_layout Section
15166 Printing and Previewing
15169 \begin_layout Subsection
15173 \begin_layout Standard
15174 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15175 using \SpecialChar LyX
15176 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15177 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15178 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15179 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15181 Additional Features
15186 \begin_layout Standard
15188 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15191 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15192 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15193 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15196 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15197 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15198 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15199 to turn your writing into printable output.
15200 This happens in two stages:
15203 \begin_layout Enumerate
15204 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15205 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15207 a file with the extension,
15208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15222 \begin_layout Enumerate
15223 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15224 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15225 to use the commands in the
15229 file to produce printable output.
15232 \begin_layout Subsection
15233 Output file formats
15234 \begin_inset Index idx
15237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15246 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15253 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15254 Simple text (ASCII)
15255 \begin_inset Index idx
15258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15259 File formats ! ASCII
15267 \begin_layout Standard
15268 This file type has the extension
15269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15281 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15285 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15292 \begin_layout Standard
15293 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15295 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15296 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15298 \begin_inset space ~
15304 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15305 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15306 bibliography (section
15307 \begin_inset space ~
15311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15313 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15318 If your document includes such material, use
15320 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15321 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15323 \begin_inset space ~
15327 \begin_inset space ~
15331 \begin_inset space ~
15339 \begin_inset space ~
15343 \begin_inset space ~
15349 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15350 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15353 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15356 \begin_inset Index idx
15359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15360 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15369 \begin_layout Standard
15370 This file type has the extension
15371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15382 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15385 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15386 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15387 -Errors or to process it manually
15388 with console commands.
15389 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15390 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15391 's temporary directory whenever you
15392 view or export your document.
15395 \begin_layout Standard
15396 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15397 -file using the menu
15399 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15400 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15404 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15405 export variants are explained in section
15406 \begin_inset space ~
15410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15412 reference "subsec:Export"
15419 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15421 \begin_inset Index idx
15424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15433 \begin_layout Standard
15434 This file type has the extension
15435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15455 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15456 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15457 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15461 \begin_layout Standard
15462 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15463 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15464 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15465 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15466 when you view the DVI.
15467 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15470 \begin_layout Standard
15471 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15473 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15474 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15479 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15480 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15482 \begin_inset space ~
15488 The latter option uses the program
15490 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15496 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15499 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15500 font access (see section
15501 \begin_inset space ~
15505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15507 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15512 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15513 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15518 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15520 \begin_inset Index idx
15523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15524 File formats ! PostScript
15532 \begin_layout Standard
15533 This file type has the extension
15534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15546 PostScript was developed by the company
15550 as a printer language.
15551 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15553 PostScript can be seen as a
15554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15557 programming language
15558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15561 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15566 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15573 \begin_inset Index idx
15576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15578 -packages ! pstricks
15588 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15591 \begin_layout Standard
15592 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15596 Encapsulated PostScript
15597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15600 (EPS, file extension
15601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15613 As \SpecialChar LyX
15614 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15615 convert them in the background to EPS.
15616 If, for example, you have 50
15617 \begin_inset space ~
15620 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15622 \begin_inset space ~
15625 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15626 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15628 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15629 EPS to avoid this problem.
15632 \begin_layout Standard
15633 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15635 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15636 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15642 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15644 \begin_inset Index idx
15647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15654 \begin_inset Index idx
15657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15666 \begin_layout Standard
15667 This file type has the extension
15668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15684 Portable Document Format
15685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15692 was derived from PostScript.
15693 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15702 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15703 looks exactly the same.
15706 \begin_layout Standard
15707 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15711 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15715 (JPG, file extension
15716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15743 Portable Network Graphics
15744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15747 (PNG, file extension
15748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15760 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15761 converts them in the
15762 background to one of these formats.
15763 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15764 will slow down your workflow.
15765 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15768 \begin_layout Standard
15769 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15771 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15777 \begin_layout Description
15779 \begin_inset space ~
15782 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15786 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15789 \begin_layout Description
15791 \begin_inset space ~
15798 ) This uses the program
15800 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15803 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15806 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15809 is a new engine, derived from
15813 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15814 access (see section
15815 \begin_inset space ~
15819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15821 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15826 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15827 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15832 \begin_layout Description
15834 \begin_inset space ~
15841 ) This uses the program
15846 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15852 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15853 font access (see section
15854 \begin_inset space ~
15858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15860 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15865 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15866 vertically written Japanese.
15869 \begin_layout Description
15871 \begin_inset space ~
15874 (cropped) This is the same as
15877 \begin_inset space ~
15882 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15883 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15884 to generate good-looking
15885 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15888 \begin_layout Description
15890 \begin_inset space ~
15893 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15897 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15901 \begin_layout Description
15903 \begin_inset space ~
15906 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15910 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15911 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15915 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15916 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15919 \begin_layout Standard
15923 \begin_inset space ~
15932 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15933 works without problems.
15934 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15935 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15939 \begin_inset space ~
15947 \begin_inset space ~
15952 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15960 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15962 \begin_inset Index idx
15965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15966 FileFormats ! XHTML
15972 \begin_inset Index idx
15975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15984 \begin_layout Standard
15985 This file type has the extension
15986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15998 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15999 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16000 When \SpecialChar LyX
16001 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16002 suitable for the purpose.
16003 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16005 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16006 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16009 between different formats, which are described in section
16011 Math Output in XHTML
16016 \begin_inset space ~
16024 \begin_layout Standard
16025 XHTML output remains
16026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16033 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16034 features are supported yet.
16038 and the World Wide Web
16042 Additional Features
16044 manual, for more information.
16047 \begin_layout Standard
16048 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16050 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16051 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16057 \begin_layout Subsection
16059 \begin_inset Index idx
16062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16071 \begin_layout Standard
16072 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16073 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16082 or use the toolbar button
16089 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16090 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
16091 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16097 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16101 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16103 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16109 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
16114 Further output formats can be selected via
16116 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16117 View (Other Formats)
16119 or the toolbar button
16128 \begin_layout Standard
16129 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16130 viewer window using the menu
16132 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16137 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16138 Update (Other Formats)
16143 \begin_layout Standard
16144 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16147 To have a real output, export your document.
16150 \begin_layout Section
16151 A few Words about Typography
16152 \begin_inset Index idx
16155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16164 \begin_layout Subsection
16165 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16166 \begin_inset Index idx
16169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16176 \begin_inset Index idx
16179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16188 \begin_layout Standard
16189 In \SpecialChar LyX
16191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16202 character comes in four lengths: the
16214 , and the minus sign:
16215 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16221 \begin_layout Standard
16222 \begin_inset Tabular
16223 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16224 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16225 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16226 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16227 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16228 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16257 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16297 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16322 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16324 \begin_inset space ~
16327 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16334 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16359 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16361 \begin_inset space ~
16364 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16385 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16419 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16425 \begin_layout Standard
16426 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16438 character multiple times in a row.
16439 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16440 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16447 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16459 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16463 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16473 \begin_layout Standard
16474 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16475 math mode and has a length of its own.
16476 Here are some examples:
16479 \begin_layout Enumerate
16480 line- and page-breaks
16481 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16491 \begin_layout Enumerate
16493 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16503 \begin_layout Enumerate
16504 Oh — there's a dash.
16505 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16515 \begin_layout Enumerate
16516 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16520 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16530 \begin_layout Subsection
16532 \begin_inset Index idx
16535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16542 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16544 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16551 \begin_layout Standard
16552 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16553 but automatically in the output.
16554 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16560 \begin_inset Index idx
16563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16570 following the rules of the document language.
16573 \begin_layout Standard
16575 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16579 font and with unusual constructs, like
16580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16588 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16589 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16590 This is done with the menu
16592 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16593 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16595 \begin_inset space ~
16601 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16603 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16607 \begin_layout Standard
16608 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16609 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16620 would then see the hyphen
16621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16628 as a hyphenation possibility.
16629 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16630 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16631 as described in section
16633 Prevent Hyphenation
16638 \begin_inset space ~
16646 \begin_layout Subsection
16648 \begin_inset Index idx
16651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16660 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16661 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16662 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16664 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16671 \begin_layout Standard
16672 When \SpecialChar LyX
16673 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16674 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16676 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16682 appropriate amount of space.
16683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16686 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16688 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16689 gets after another word.
16692 \begin_layout Standard
16693 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16694 not work in all cases.
16696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16707 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16708 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16711 \begin_layout Standard
16712 Here are some examples of
16716 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16719 \begin_layout Itemize
16724 \begin_layout Itemize
16729 \begin_layout Standard
16730 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16733 \begin_layout Itemize
16735 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16739 this is too much space!
16742 \begin_layout Itemize
16747 \begin_layout Standard
16748 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16751 \begin_layout Standard
16752 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16755 \begin_layout Enumerate
16759 \begin_inset space ~
16764 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16765 \begin_inset space ~
16769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16771 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16776 \begin_inset Index idx
16779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16780 Spaces ! inter-word
16788 \begin_layout Enumerate
16792 \begin_inset space ~
16797 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16798 \begin_inset space ~
16802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16804 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16809 \begin_inset Index idx
16812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16821 \begin_layout Enumerate
16825 \begin_inset space ~
16829 \begin_inset space ~
16833 \begin_inset space ~
16840 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16842 \begin_inset space ~
16847 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16848 This function is also bound to
16851 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16857 \begin_layout Standard
16858 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16861 \begin_layout Itemize
16863 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16867 \begin_inset space \space{}
16870 this is too much space!
16873 \begin_layout Itemize
16874 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16878 \begin_layout Standard
16879 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16880 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16882 will take care of this.
16885 \begin_layout Standard
16886 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16890 \begin_inset space ~
16896 feature described in the section
16898 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16903 Additional Features
16908 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16910 \begin_inset Index idx
16913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16914 Typography ! Quotes
16920 \begin_inset Index idx
16923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16954 \begin_layout Standard
16956 usually sets quotes correctly.
16957 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16958 and use a closing quote at the end.
16960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16968 The keyboard character,
16972 , generates this automatically.
16975 \begin_layout Standard
16976 You can specify what character the
16980 key produces using the submenu
16986 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16990 \begin_inset Index idx
16993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16994 Document ! Settings
17004 There are six choices:
17007 \begin_layout Labeling
17008 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17031 \begin_layout Labeling
17032 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17035 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17039 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17045 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17049 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17055 \begin_layout Labeling
17056 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17059 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17063 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17069 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17073 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17079 \begin_layout Labeling
17080 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17083 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17087 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17093 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17097 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17103 \begin_layout Labeling
17104 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17107 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17111 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17117 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17121 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17127 \begin_layout Labeling
17128 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17131 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17135 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17141 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17145 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17151 \begin_layout Standard
17152 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
17155 arg "quote-insert single"
17161 \begin_layout Subsection
17163 \begin_inset Index idx
17166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17167 Typography ! Ligatures
17173 \begin_inset Index idx
17176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17207 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17214 \begin_layout Standard
17215 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17216 print them as single characters.
17217 These groups are known as
17222 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17223 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17225 Here are the standard ligatures:
17228 \begin_layout Itemize
17232 \begin_layout Itemize
17236 \begin_layout Itemize
17240 \begin_layout Itemize
17244 \begin_layout Itemize
17248 \begin_layout Standard
17249 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17252 \begin_layout Standard
17253 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17254 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17262 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17278 To break a ligature, use
17280 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17281 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17283 \begin_inset space ~
17290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17301 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17318 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17326 \begin_layout Subsection
17328 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
17330 \begin_inset Index idx
17333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17341 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17343 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17350 \begin_layout Standard
17353 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17354 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
17358 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
17361 \begin_layout Description
17363 The name of the game.
17366 \begin_layout Description
17368 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
17372 \begin_layout Description
17374 The \SpecialChar TeX
17375 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
17379 \begin_layout Description
17380 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17381 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17385 \begin_layout Standard
17386 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17392 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17400 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17401 world to give programs geek version numbers.
17402 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17403 converges to the number
17404 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17407 : The actual version is
17408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17416 , the previous one was
17417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17428 \begin_layout Subsection
17430 \begin_inset Index idx
17433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17442 \begin_layout Standard
17443 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17444 space between two words.
17445 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17455 for units use the menu
17457 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17458 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17460 \begin_inset space ~
17468 arg "space-insert thin"
17474 \begin_layout Standard
17475 Here is an example to show the differences:
17478 \begin_layout Standard
17479 \begin_inset Tabular
17480 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17481 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17482 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17483 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17490 \begin_inset space ~
17494 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17506 space between number and unit
17513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17518 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17522 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17534 half space between number and unit
17547 \begin_layout Subsection
17549 \begin_inset Index idx
17552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17553 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17561 \begin_layout Standard
17562 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17564 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17565 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17566 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17567 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17568 These bits of text became known as
17579 \begin_layout Standard
17580 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17581 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17582 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17583 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17584 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17585 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17586 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17587 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17588 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17589 \begin_inset Newline newline
17597 \begin_inset Newline newline
17605 \begin_inset Newline newline
17608 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17609 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17610 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17612 \begin_inset space ~
17616 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17618 key "latexcompanion"
17623 \begin_inset space ~
17627 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17633 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17634 's page break mechanism.
17637 \begin_layout Chapter
17638 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17641 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17648 \begin_layout Standard
17649 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17652 \begin_inset space ~
17658 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17661 \begin_layout Section
17663 \begin_inset Index idx
17666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17673 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17682 \begin_layout Standard
17684 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17687 \begin_layout Description
17690 \begin_inset space ~
17693 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17694 \begin_inset Newline newline
17698 \begin_inset Note Note
17701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17702 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17710 \begin_layout Description
17711 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17712 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17713 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17716 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17717 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17719 \begin_inset space ~
17725 \begin_inset Newline newline
17729 \begin_inset Note Comment
17732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17733 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17742 \begin_layout Description
17744 \begin_inset space ~
17747 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17748 set in the document settings under
17750 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17752 \begin_inset space ~
17758 \begin_inset Newline newline
17762 \begin_inset Newline newline
17766 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17775 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17776 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17781 of a comment that appears in the output.
17787 \begin_inset Newline newline
17791 \begin_inset Newline newline
17794 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17797 \begin_layout Standard
17798 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17806 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17810 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17813 \begin_layout Section
17815 \begin_inset Index idx
17818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17825 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17827 name "sec:Footnotes"
17834 \begin_layout Standard
17836 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17839 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17842 or the toolbar button
17845 arg "footnote-insert"
17857 \begin_inset Graphics
17858 filename clipart/footnote.png
17867 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17868 's representation of your footnote.
17878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17897 label, the box will
17901 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17902 Clicking on the box label again will close
17915 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17916 and click on the footnote
17931 \begin_layout Standard
17932 Here is an example footnote:
17940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17941 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17949 \begin_layout Standard
17950 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17951 position where the footnote box is placed.
17952 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17953 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17954 according to the document class.
17956 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
17957 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17963 ey are described in the
17966 \begin_inset space ~
17974 \begin_layout Section
17976 \begin_inset Index idx
17979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17988 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17995 \begin_layout Standard
17996 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
17998 When you insert a margin note via the menu
18000 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18002 \begin_inset space ~
18007 or the toolbar button
18010 arg "marginalnote-insert"
18029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18036 appearing within your text.
18037 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18038 's representation of your margin
18047 \begin_layout Standard
18048 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
18052 \begin_inset Marginal
18055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18057 This is a marginal note.
18065 \begin_layout Standard
18066 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
18067 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
18068 pages, right on odd pages.
18071 \begin_layout Standard
18072 For further information about marginal notes see the section
18075 \begin_inset space ~
18083 \begin_inset space ~
18091 \begin_layout Section
18092 Graphics and Images
18093 \begin_inset Index idx
18096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18103 \begin_inset Index idx
18106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18113 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18115 name "sec:Graphics"
18122 \begin_layout Standard
18123 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18124 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18127 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18132 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18136 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18139 \begin_layout Standard
18140 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18145 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18146 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18148 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18149 \begin_inset space ~
18153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18155 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18162 \begin_layout Standard
18167 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18168 of the image in the output.
18169 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18173 \begin_inset space ~
18177 \begin_inset space ~
18186 \begin_inset space ~
18190 \begin_inset space ~
18194 \begin_inset space ~
18199 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18200 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18208 \begin_layout Standard
18212 \begin_inset space ~
18216 \begin_inset space ~
18221 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18222 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18224 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18229 \begin_inset space ~
18234 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18235 with the image size is printed.
18238 \begin_layout Standard
18239 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18240 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18242 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18245 \begin_layout Standard
18247 \begin_inset Graphics
18248 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18256 \begin_layout Standard
18257 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18258 the image into a float, see section
18259 \begin_inset space ~
18263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18265 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18272 \begin_layout Subsection
18274 \begin_inset Index idx
18277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18284 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18286 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18293 \begin_layout Standard
18294 You can insert images in any known file format.
18295 But as we explained in section
18296 \begin_inset space ~
18300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18302 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18306 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18308 therefore uses the program
18312 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18313 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18314 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18315 \begin_inset space ~
18319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18321 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18328 \begin_layout Standard
18329 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18332 \begin_layout Description
18334 \begin_inset space ~
18337 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18338 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18339 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18343 Graphics Interchange Format
18344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18347 (GIF, file extension
18348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18360 \begin_inset Index idx
18363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18395 Portable Network Graphics
18396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18399 (PNG, file extension
18400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18412 \begin_inset Index idx
18415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18447 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18451 (JPG, file extension
18452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18476 \begin_inset Index idx
18479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18510 \begin_layout Description
18512 \begin_inset space ~
18515 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18517 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18518 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18519 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18520 \begin_inset Newline newline
18523 Scalable image formats can be
18524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18527 Scalable Vector Graphics
18528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18531 (SVG, file extension
18532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18544 \begin_inset Index idx
18547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18579 Encapsulated PostScript
18580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18583 (EPS, file extension
18584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18596 \begin_inset Index idx
18599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18631 Portable Document Format
18632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18635 (PDF, file extension
18636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18648 \begin_inset Index idx
18651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18666 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18667 result will not be scalable.
18668 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18674 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18682 \begin_layout Standard
18683 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18690 \begin_layout Subsection
18691 Grouping of Image Settings
18692 \begin_inset Index idx
18695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18696 Images ! Settings grouping
18704 \begin_layout Standard
18705 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18707 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18708 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18710 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18711 need to manually change each of them.
18715 \begin_layout Standard
18716 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18719 \begin_inset space ~
18723 \begin_inset space ~
18735 \begin_inset space ~
18739 \begin_inset space ~
18745 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18746 and checking the name of the desired group.
18749 \begin_layout Section
18751 \begin_inset Index idx
18754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18761 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18770 \begin_layout Standard
18771 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18774 arg "tabular-insert"
18779 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18783 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18784 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18785 from the rest of the table.
18786 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18787 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18789 Here is an example table:
18792 \begin_layout Standard
18794 \begin_inset Tabular
18795 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18796 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18797 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18798 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18799 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18800 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19000 \begin_layout Subsection
19004 \begin_layout Standard
19005 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
19008 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
19012 This brings up the table dialog.
19013 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
19014 cursor is placed currently.
19015 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
19016 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
19017 done on all of your selection.
19020 \begin_layout Standard
19021 In addition to the table dialog, the
19024 \begin_inset space ~
19029 helps you in setting table properties.
19030 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
19033 \begin_layout Standard
19037 \begin_inset space ~
19042 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
19043 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
19044 current cell respectively.
19045 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
19047 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
19048 of text, see section
19049 \begin_inset space ~
19053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19055 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
19062 \begin_layout Standard
19063 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19064 using the check box
19073 This will merge the cells to
19077 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19078 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19079 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19080 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19081 in the last row without the upper border:
19084 \begin_layout Standard
19086 \begin_inset Tabular
19087 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19088 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19089 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19090 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19091 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19092 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19103 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19112 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19188 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19223 \begin_layout Standard
19224 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19225 -arguments for the table.
19226 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19227 explained in the chapter
19234 \begin_inset space ~
19240 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19241 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19242 but are visible in the output.
19245 \begin_layout Standard
19246 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19254 Most DVI-viewers are
19258 able to display rotations.
19266 \begin_layout Standard
19271 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19276 adds lines for all cell borders.
19279 \begin_layout Subsection
19281 \begin_inset Index idx
19284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19285 Tables ! Longtables
19291 \begin_inset Index idx
19294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19303 \begin_layout Standard
19304 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19307 \begin_inset space ~
19311 \begin_inset space ~
19320 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19321 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19324 \begin_layout Description
19329 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19330 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19331 except for the first page, if
19334 \begin_inset space ~
19342 \begin_layout Description
19346 \begin_inset space ~
19351 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19352 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19355 \begin_layout Description
19360 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19361 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19362 except for the last page, if
19365 \begin_inset space ~
19373 \begin_layout Description
19377 \begin_inset space ~
19382 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19383 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19386 \begin_layout Description
19387 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19388 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19390 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19394 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19397 \begin_inset space ~
19405 \begin_layout Standard
19406 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19407 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19408 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19414 In this context, first means first in this order:
19417 \begin_inset space ~
19429 \begin_inset space ~
19434 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19437 \begin_layout Standard
19439 \begin_inset Tabular
19440 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19441 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19442 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19443 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19444 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19445 <row endfirsthead="true">
19446 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19452 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19457 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19466 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19476 <row endfirsthead="true">
19477 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19488 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19497 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19509 <row endhead="true">
19510 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19521 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19530 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19540 <row endhead="true">
19541 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19552 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19561 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19573 <row endfoot="true">
19574 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19585 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19594 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19625 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20566 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20575 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20584 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20595 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20626 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20657 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20688 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20719 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20750 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20781 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20812 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20843 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20874 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20905 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20936 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20967 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20998 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21029 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21060 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21091 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21122 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21153 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21184 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21215 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21246 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21277 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21308 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21339 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21370 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21401 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21432 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21463 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21494 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21525 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21555 <row endlastfoot="true">
21556 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21567 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21576 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21593 \begin_layout Subsection
21595 \begin_inset Index idx
21598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21607 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21614 \begin_layout Standard
21615 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21616 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21617 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21618 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21622 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21625 \begin_layout Standard
21626 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21627 for the column in the table dialog.
21628 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21629 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21633 \begin_layout Standard
21635 \begin_inset Tabular
21636 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21637 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21638 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21639 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21640 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21660 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21729 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21785 This is longer now.
21790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21841 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21842 This is longer now.
21847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21873 \begin_layout Standard
21874 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21875 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21880 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21881 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21887 Selection with the mouse or with
21891 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21892 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21893 the selection from outside the table.
21896 \begin_layout Section
21898 \begin_inset Index idx
21901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21908 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21917 \begin_layout Subsection
21921 \begin_layout Standard
21922 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21923 have a fixed location.
21925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21932 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21940 \begin_inset space ~
21945 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21946 too many notes on the current page.
21949 \begin_layout Standard
21950 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21951 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21952 and pages without text.
21953 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21954 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21955 Floats are therefore numbered.
21956 Referencing is described in section
21957 \begin_inset space ~
21961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21963 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21970 \begin_layout Standard
21971 To insert a float, use the menu
21973 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21977 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21978 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21980 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21981 \begin_inset Index idx
21984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21990 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21991 paragraph within the float.
21992 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
21993 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
21994 left-clicking on the box label.
21995 A closed float box looks like this:
21996 \begin_inset Graphics
21997 filename clipart/float.png
22002 – a gray button with a red label.
22005 \begin_layout Standard
22006 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
22008 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
22011 \begin_layout Subsection
22013 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22015 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22020 \begin_inset Index idx
22023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22024 Floats ! Figure floats
22032 \begin_layout Standard
22034 \begin_inset space ~
22038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22040 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22044 was created using the menu
22046 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22047 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22053 arg "float-insert figure"
22057 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22060 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22066 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22070 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22071 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22073 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22075 \begin_inset space ~
22083 arg "layout-paragraph"
22089 \begin_layout Standard
22090 \begin_inset Float figure
22095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22097 \begin_inset Graphics
22098 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22108 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22111 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22113 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22117 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22130 \begin_layout Standard
22131 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22132 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22134 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22143 ) and refer to it using the menu
22145 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22151 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22155 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22156 vague references like
22157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22164 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22165 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22175 For more about cross-references, see section
22176 \begin_inset space ~
22180 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22182 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22189 \begin_layout Standard
22190 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22191 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22192 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22193 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22194 as described in section
22195 \begin_inset space ~
22199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22201 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22207 \begin_inset space ~
22211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22213 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22217 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22218 You can also set the images one below the other.
22220 \begin_inset space ~
22224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22226 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22233 reference "fig:Platypus"
22237 are the subfigures.
22240 \begin_layout Standard
22241 \begin_inset Float figure
22246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22247 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22251 \begin_inset Float figure
22256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22257 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22260 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22262 name "fig:Undefinable"
22274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22275 \begin_inset Graphics
22276 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22287 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22291 \begin_inset Float figure
22296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22297 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22300 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22302 name "fig:Platypus"
22314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22315 \begin_inset Graphics
22316 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22328 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22335 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22338 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22340 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22344 Two distorted images.
22357 \begin_layout Subsection
22359 \begin_inset Index idx
22362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22363 Floats ! Table floats
22371 \begin_layout Standard
22372 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22374 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22375 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22378 or the toolbar button
22381 arg "float-insert table"
22385 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22386 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22387 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22389 \begin_inset space ~
22393 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22395 reference "tab:Table-float"
22402 \begin_layout Standard
22403 \begin_inset Float table
22408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22409 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22412 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22414 name "tab:Table-float"
22426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22428 \begin_inset Tabular
22429 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22430 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22431 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22432 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22433 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22560 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22581 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22584 \end{array}\right]$
22592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22605 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22626 \begin_layout Subsection
22628 \begin_inset Index idx
22631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22640 \begin_layout Standard
22642 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22643 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22644 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22646 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22654 \begin_inset space ~
22662 \begin_layout Section
22664 \begin_inset Index idx
22667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22676 \begin_layout Standard
22678 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22680 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22681 \begin_inset space \space{}
22688 \begin_layout Standard
22689 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22690 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22692 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22696 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22697 and its alignment within the page.
22700 \begin_layout Standard
22702 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22712 height_special "totalheight"
22717 backgroundcolor "none"
22720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22723 This is a minipage.
22724 The text is set in an italic style.
22727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22730 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22731 another formatting.
22739 \begin_layout Standard
22740 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22743 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22747 as described in section
22748 \begin_inset space ~
22752 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22754 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22759 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22765 \begin_layout Standard
22766 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22776 height_special "totalheight"
22781 backgroundcolor "none"
22784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22785 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22786 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22792 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22796 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22806 height_special "totalheight"
22811 backgroundcolor "none"
22814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22815 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22816 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22824 \begin_layout Standard
22825 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22831 \begin_layout Standard
22832 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22834 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22841 \begin_inset space ~
22849 \begin_layout Chapter
22850 Mathematical Formulas
22851 \begin_inset Index idx
22854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22861 \begin_inset Index idx
22864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22893 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22895 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22902 \begin_layout Standard
22903 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22908 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22911 \begin_layout Section
22913 \begin_inset Index idx
22916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22925 \begin_layout Standard
22926 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22939 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22941 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22942 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22943 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22945 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22951 \begin_layout Standard
22952 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22956 \begin_inset space ~
22961 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22964 \begin_layout Standard
22965 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22966 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22969 \begin_layout Standard
22970 This is a line with an inline formula
22971 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22977 \begin_layout Standard
22978 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22979 paragraph, like this one:
22980 \begin_inset Formula
22987 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22990 \begin_layout Standard
22992 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
22994 For example, typing
22995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23008 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
23009 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
23013 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
23016 \begin_inset space ~
23024 \begin_layout Subsection
23025 Navigating in Formulas
23026 \begin_inset Index idx
23029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23038 \begin_layout Standard
23039 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
23040 achieved with the arrow keys.
23042 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
23043 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
23048 will leave a formula construct (a square root
23049 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
23053 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
23057 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23060 \end{array}\right]$
23068 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
23073 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
23074 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
23077 \begin_layout Standard
23082 , printed in this document as
23083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23087 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23094 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23095 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23096 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23101 For example, if you want
23102 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23110 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23120 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23124 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23129 , since in the latter case only the
23132 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23137 will be under the square root sign:
23138 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23144 \begin_layout Standard
23145 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23147 \begin_inset Formula
23149 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23158 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23159 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23162 \begin_layout Subsection
23166 \begin_layout Standard
23167 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23168 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23172 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23173 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23174 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23175 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23176 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23180 \begin_layout Subsection
23181 Exponents and Subscripts
23182 \begin_inset Index idx
23185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23192 \begin_inset Index idx
23195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23204 \begin_layout Standard
23205 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23208 arg "math-superscript"
23214 arg "math-subscript"
23217 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23219 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23222 , type in a formula
23225 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23235 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23241 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23245 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23251 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23257 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23266 , you have to use an extra
23270 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23271 For example, if you want
23272 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23278 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23284 Subscripts are similar: To get
23285 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23291 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23299 \begin_layout Subsection
23301 \begin_inset Index idx
23304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23313 \begin_layout Standard
23314 Create a fraction either with the command
23320 or by using the icon
23323 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23329 \begin_inset space ~
23335 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23336 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23337 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23342 To move back up, press
23347 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23348 \begin_inset Formula
23350 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23353 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23361 \begin_layout Subsection
23363 \begin_inset Index idx
23366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23375 \begin_layout Standard
23376 Roots can be created using the
23379 \begin_inset space ~
23387 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23393 arg "math-insert \\root"
23415 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23421 always produces a square root.
23424 \begin_layout Subsection
23425 Operators with Limits
23426 \begin_inset Index idx
23429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23436 \begin_inset Index idx
23439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23446 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23448 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23455 \begin_layout Standard
23457 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23461 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23464 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23465 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23466 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23467 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23468 The sum operator will automatically place its
23469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23476 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23478 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23482 \begin_inset Formula
23484 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23489 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23493 \begin_layout Standard
23494 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23496 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23497 behind the operator and using the menu
23499 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23500 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23502 \begin_inset space ~
23506 \begin_inset space ~
23520 \begin_layout Standard
23521 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23530 \begin_inset Index idx
23533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23540 \begin_inset Formula
23542 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23547 which will place the
23548 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23560 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23561 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23567 \begin_layout Standard
23568 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23575 Have a look at section
23576 \begin_inset space ~
23580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23582 reference "subsec:Functions"
23586 for an explanation of function macros.
23589 \begin_layout Subsection
23591 \begin_inset Index idx
23594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23603 \begin_layout Standard
23604 Most math symbols can be found in the
23607 \begin_inset space ~
23612 under one of several categories; including
23629 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23633 \begin_layout Standard
23634 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23635 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23636 don't have to use the
23639 \begin_inset space ~
23644 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23646 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23649 \begin_layout Subsection
23651 \begin_inset Index idx
23654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23663 \begin_layout Standard
23664 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23670 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23676 \begin_inset space ~
23684 arg "math-insert \\space"
23688 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23689 For example, the sequence
23694 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23697 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23699 \begin_inset Graphics
23700 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23705 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23706 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23707 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23708 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23709 , because they are negative
23711 Here are two examples:
23714 \begin_layout Standard
23724 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23730 \begin_layout Standard
23740 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23746 \begin_layout Subsection
23748 \begin_inset Index idx
23751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23758 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23760 name "subsec:Functions"
23767 \begin_layout Standard
23771 \begin_inset space ~
23776 contains under the button
23779 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23782 a number of function macros, such as
23783 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23787 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23795 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23802 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23803 avoid confusions, because
23804 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23808 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23814 \begin_layout Standard
23815 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23817 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23821 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23827 \begin_layout Standard
23828 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23829 are placed, as described in section
23830 \begin_inset space ~
23834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23836 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23843 \begin_layout Subsection
23845 \begin_inset Index idx
23848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23857 \begin_layout Standard
23858 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23860 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23861 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
23862 commands, for example, to enter
23863 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23866 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23867 Our example is entered by typing
23872 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23879 \begin_inset space ~
23883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23885 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23889 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23892 \begin_layout Standard
23893 \begin_inset Float table
23898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23899 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23902 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23904 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23908 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23918 \begin_inset Tabular
23919 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23920 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23921 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23922 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23923 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24007 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24061 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
24071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24115 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24169 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24223 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24277 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24331 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24385 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24439 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24484 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24505 \begin_layout Standard
24506 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24509 \begin_inset space ~
24517 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24520 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24524 \begin_layout Section
24525 Brackets and Delimiters
24526 \begin_inset Index idx
24529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24536 \begin_inset Index idx
24539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24546 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24548 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24555 \begin_layout Standard
24556 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24558 For some purposes, using just the keys
24563 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24564 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24565 toolbar delimiter icon
24568 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24572 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24573 \begin_inset Formula
24575 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24583 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24584 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24588 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24591 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24597 \begin_inset Formula
24599 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24607 \begin_layout Standard
24608 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24609 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24613 \begin_layout Standard
24614 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24615 left side and right side.
24616 If you use the option
24619 \begin_inset space ~
24624 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24625 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24627 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24632 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24633 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24636 \begin_layout Standard
24637 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24638 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24639 is to go inside the brackets.
24640 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24645 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24646 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24647 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24651 arg "math-delim ( )"
24657 \begin_layout Section
24658 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24659 \begin_inset Index idx
24662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24669 \begin_inset Index idx
24672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24679 \begin_inset Index idx
24682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24683 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24691 \begin_layout Standard
24692 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24696 \begin_inset space ~
24704 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24708 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24709 Here is an example:
24710 \begin_inset Formula
24712 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24721 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24722 \begin_inset space ~
24726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24728 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24733 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24734 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24735 This alignment is set in the box
24740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24789 for every column as default.
24790 For example, the sequence
24791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24802 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24803 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24804 corresponds to the relevant column.
24805 The result will look like this:
24806 \begin_inset Formula
24809 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24810 column & has & has\,right\\
24811 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24820 \begin_layout Standard
24821 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24824 arg "newline-insert newline"
24827 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24828 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24830 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24833 or the math toolbar.
24836 \begin_layout Standard
24837 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24838 It can be created with the menu
24840 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24841 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24843 \begin_inset space ~
24855 Here is an example:
24856 \begin_inset Formula
24870 \begin_layout Standard
24871 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24874 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24877 arg "newline-insert newline"
24881 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24886 arg "newline-insert newline"
24889 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24897 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24898 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24899 A new row is created by every further entry of
24902 arg "newline-insert newline"
24906 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24907 Here is an example:
24908 \begin_inset Formula
24910 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24911 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24916 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24917 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24918 \begin_inset Formula
24920 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24928 \begin_layout Standard
24929 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24936 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24937 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24940 reference "eq:asquared"
24945 The other types are described in section
24946 \begin_inset space ~
24950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24952 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24959 \begin_layout Section
24960 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24961 \begin_inset Index idx
24964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24965 Math ! Formula numbering
24971 \begin_inset Index idx
24974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24975 Math ! Referencing formulas
24981 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24983 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24990 \begin_layout Standard
24991 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24993 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24994 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24996 \begin_inset space ~
25000 \begin_inset space ~
25008 arg "math-number-toggle"
25012 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25013 within parentheses.
25014 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
25015 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
25016 the document class.
25017 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
25018 separated by a dot:
25019 \begin_inset Formula
25029 arg "math-number-toggle"
25032 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
25033 You can only number displayed formulas.
25036 \begin_layout Standard
25037 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
25039 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25040 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25042 \begin_inset space ~
25046 \begin_inset space ~
25054 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
25057 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
25058 \begin_inset Formula
25061 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
25067 To number all lines use the shortcut
25070 arg "math-number-toggle"
25076 \begin_layout Standard
25077 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25080 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
25081 A label is inserted with the menu
25083 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25092 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25093 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25094 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25106 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25107 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25108 We inserted in the following example the label
25109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25116 in the second line:
25117 \begin_inset Formula
25119 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25120 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25125 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25126 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25127 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25129 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25131 \begin_inset space ~
25139 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25143 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25144 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25145 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25146 as the formula number:
25149 \begin_layout Standard
25150 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25153 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25160 \begin_layout Standard
25161 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25162 's cross-reference box are described in section
25163 \begin_inset space ~
25167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25169 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25174 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25182 \begin_layout Section
25183 User defined math macros
25184 \begin_inset Index idx
25187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25196 \begin_layout Standard
25198 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25199 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25200 Math macros are explained in section
25203 \begin_inset space ~
25215 \begin_layout Section
25219 \begin_layout Subsection
25221 \begin_inset Index idx
25224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25233 \begin_layout Standard
25234 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25235 To set a font in a formula, use the
25238 \begin_inset space ~
25246 arg "math-insert \\font"
25249 , or enter its command, listed in table
25250 \begin_inset space ~
25254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25256 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25263 \begin_layout Standard
25264 \begin_inset Float table
25269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25270 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25273 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25275 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25279 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25289 \begin_inset Tabular
25290 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25291 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25292 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25293 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25325 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25352 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25379 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25412 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25439 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25466 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25500 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25527 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25561 \begin_layout Standard
25562 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25570 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25586 \begin_layout Standard
25587 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25588 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25593 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25594 space when you need a space in the box.
25595 Here is an example where
25596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25607 denotes the set of numbers:
25608 \begin_inset Formula
25610 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25618 \begin_layout Standard
25619 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25620 You can, for example, put a character in
25629 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25633 \begin_inset Newline newline
25636 So it is better not to use this feature.
25639 \begin_layout Standard
25640 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25641 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25645 \begin_inset Newline newline
25648 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25654 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25655 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25661 \begin_layout Standard
25668 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25671 \begin_layout Standard
25672 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25674 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25675 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25677 \begin_inset space ~
25685 \begin_layout Subsection
25687 \begin_inset Index idx
25690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25699 \begin_layout Standard
25700 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25702 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25706 \begin_inset space ~
25710 \begin_inset space ~
25718 \begin_inset space ~
25726 arg "math-insert \\font"
25730 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25731 in black instead of blue.
25732 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25733 Here is an example:
25734 \begin_inset Formula
25737 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25738 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25747 \begin_layout Subsection
25749 \begin_inset Index idx
25752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25761 \begin_layout Standard
25762 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25763 automatically chosen in most situations.
25781 For most characters,
25789 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25790 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25795 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25796 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25797 thinks are appropriate.
25798 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25801 arg "math-insert \\style"
25805 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25806 For example, you can set
25807 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25810 , which is normally in
25819 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25823 The four styles are used in the following example:
25826 \begin_layout Standard
25827 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25831 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25835 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25839 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25845 \begin_layout Standard
25846 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25847 is set in a particular size with the menu
25849 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25851 \begin_inset space ~
25856 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25857 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25858 will be adjusted to correspond.
25859 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25870 \begin_layout Standard
25874 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25880 \begin_layout Section
25881 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25883 \begin_inset Index idx
25886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25893 \begin_inset Index idx
25896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25905 \begin_layout Standard
25907 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
25908 that are in common use.
25911 \begin_layout Subsection
25912 Enabling AMS-Support
25915 \begin_layout Standard
25916 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25917 the document by selecting the checkbox
25920 \begin_inset space ~
25924 \begin_inset space ~
25928 \begin_inset space ~
25935 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25939 \begin_inset Index idx
25942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25943 Document ! Settings
25951 \begin_inset space ~
25957 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25958 -errors in formulas,
25959 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25962 \begin_layout Subsection
25964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25966 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25971 \begin_inset Index idx
25974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25975 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25983 \begin_layout Standard
25984 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25985 provides a selection of different formula types.
25987 allows you to choose between
26008 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
26009 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26015 , for an explanation of these formula types.
26018 \begin_layout Chapter
26022 \begin_layout Section
26024 \begin_inset Index idx
26027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26034 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26036 name "sec:Cross-References"
26043 \begin_layout Standard
26044 One of \SpecialChar LyX
26045 's strengths is cross-references.
26046 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
26048 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
26049 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
26050 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
26053 \begin_layout Enumerate
26057 \begin_layout Enumerate
26058 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26060 name "enu:Second-item"
26067 \begin_layout Enumerate
26071 \begin_layout Standard
26072 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
26074 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26077 or by pressing the toolbar button
26084 A gray label box like this:
26085 \begin_inset Graphics
26086 filename clipart/label.png
26091 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
26093 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
26095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26128 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26129 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26145 \begin_layout Standard
26146 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26148 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26151 or the toolbar button
26154 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26158 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26159 \begin_inset Graphics
26160 filename clipart/reference.png
26165 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26167 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26180 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26184 \begin_layout Standard
26185 As an alternative to
26187 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26190 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26195 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26196 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26198 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26210 \begin_layout Standard
26211 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26212 \begin_inset space ~
26216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26218 reference "enu:Second-item"
26225 \begin_layout Standard
26226 It is recommended to use a protected space
26230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26231 described in section
26232 \begin_inset space ~
26236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26238 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26247 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26248 line breaks between them.
26251 \begin_layout Standard
26252 There are six formats of cross-references:
26255 \begin_layout Description
26256 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26259 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26266 \begin_layout Description
26267 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26268 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26280 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26287 \begin_layout Description
26288 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26289 \begin_inset space ~
26293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26294 LatexCommand pageref
26295 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26302 \begin_layout Description
26304 \begin_inset space ~
26308 \begin_inset space ~
26311 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26313 LatexCommand vpageref
26314 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26319 \begin_inset Newline newline
26322 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26323 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26324 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26325 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26326 it prints “on the next page”.
26327 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26330 \begin_layout Description
26332 \begin_inset space ~
26336 \begin_inset space ~
26340 \begin_inset space ~
26343 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26346 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26351 \begin_inset Newline newline
26354 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26360 ; otherwise it behaves like
26364 \begin_inset space ~
26368 \begin_inset space ~
26377 \begin_layout Description
26379 \begin_inset space ~
26382 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26383 \begin_inset Newline newline
26387 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26395 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26405 \begin_inset Index idx
26408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26410 -packages ! prettyref
26416 \begin_inset Index idx
26419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26421 -packages ! refstyle
26432 \begin_inset Newline newline
26435 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26436 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26439 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26443 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26444 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26452 is the default and preferred because
26456 supports only English documents.
26457 The format is specified by using the command
26469 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26470 preamble of the document.
26471 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26484 ) can be done with this command
26485 \begin_inset Newline newline
26492 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26497 \begin_inset Newline newline
26500 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26502 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26504 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26511 \begin_layout Description
26513 \begin_inset space ~
26516 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26518 LatexCommand nameref
26519 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26526 \begin_layout Standard
26527 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26528 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26530 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26534 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26538 \begin_layout Standard
26539 You can only use the style
26543 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26547 is always possible.
26550 \begin_layout Standard
26551 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26552 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26554 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26555 \begin_inset space ~
26559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26561 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26568 \begin_layout Standard
26569 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26573 \begin_inset space ~
26577 \begin_inset space ~
26582 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26583 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26586 \begin_inset space ~
26591 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26592 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26595 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26601 \begin_layout Standard
26602 You can change labels at any time.
26603 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26604 do not need to think about this.
26607 \begin_layout Standard
26608 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26610 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26614 \begin_layout Standard
26615 References are described in detail in the section
26616 \begin_inset space ~
26626 \begin_inset space ~
26634 \begin_layout Section
26635 Table of Contents and other Listings
26636 \begin_inset Index idx
26639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26646 \begin_inset Index idx
26649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26650 Navigating ! Outline
26656 \begin_inset Index idx
26659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26666 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26675 \begin_layout Subsection
26677 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26679 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26686 \begin_layout Standard
26687 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26689 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26690 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26692 \begin_inset space ~
26696 \begin_inset space ~
26702 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26704 If you click on it, the
26708 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26709 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26710 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26712 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26714 \begin_inset space ~
26719 that is described in section
26720 \begin_inset space ~
26724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26726 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26733 \begin_layout Standard
26734 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26735 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26737 \begin_inset space ~
26741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26743 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26747 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26749 \begin_inset space ~
26753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26755 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26759 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26761 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26764 \begin_layout Subsection
26765 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26766 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26768 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26775 \begin_layout Standard
26776 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26778 You can insert them via the
26780 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26784 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26787 \begin_layout Section
26788 URLs and Hyperlinks
26789 \begin_inset Index idx
26792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26799 \begin_inset Index idx
26802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26811 \begin_layout Subsection
26813 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26822 \begin_layout Standard
26823 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26825 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26831 \begin_layout Standard
26832 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26834 \begin_inset Flex URL
26837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26847 \begin_layout Standard
26848 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26854 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26858 \begin_layout Standard
26859 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26867 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26876 \begin_layout Subsection
26878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26880 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
26887 \begin_layout Standard
26888 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26890 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26893 or with the toolbar button
26900 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26909 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26910 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26911 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26913 name "LyX's homepage"
26914 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26918 , an Email address like this:
26919 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26921 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26922 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26927 , or a link to a file.
26930 \begin_layout Standard
26931 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26944 to the link target.
26947 \begin_layout Standard
26948 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26949 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26950 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26951 the text style dialog.
26952 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26956 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26958 name "LyX's homepage"
26959 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26966 \begin_layout Standard
26967 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26971 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26973 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26974 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26978 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26980 \begin_inset Newline newline
26988 \begin_inset Newline newline
26995 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26998 \begin_layout Section
27000 \begin_inset Index idx
27003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27012 name "sec:Appendices"
27019 \begin_layout Standard
27020 Appendices are created with the menu
27022 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27024 \begin_inset space ~
27028 \begin_inset space ~
27034 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
27035 as the appendix part of the book.
27036 This part is marked with a red borderline.
27039 \begin_layout Standard
27040 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
27041 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
27042 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
27043 and the subsection number.
27044 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
27048 \begin_layout Standard
27050 \begin_inset space ~
27054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27056 reference "chap:Credits"
27061 \begin_inset space ~
27065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27067 reference "subsec:Export"
27074 \begin_layout Section
27076 \begin_inset Index idx
27079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27086 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27088 name "sec:Bibliography"
27095 \begin_layout Standard
27096 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
27098 You can include a bibliography database,
27102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27103 Known under the name
27104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27107 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27117 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
27118 manually, using the paragraph environment
27122 , which was described in section
27123 \begin_inset space ~
27127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27129 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
27134 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27135 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27139 use a bibliography database.
27142 \begin_layout Subsection
27143 The Bibliography Environment
27146 \begin_layout Standard
27151 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27153 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27162 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27164 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
27167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27174 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27177 \begin_layout Standard
27178 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27180 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27183 or the toolbar button
27186 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27190 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27191 containing the available citations.
27192 Select one or more keys from the list and
27202 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27203 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27207 \begin_layout Standard
27208 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27209 entry with surrounding brackets.
27214 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27215 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27227 \begin_layout Standard
27231 Companion Second Edition
27234 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27236 key "latexcompanion"
27243 \begin_layout Standard
27244 The \SpecialChar LyX
27245 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27246 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27255 \begin_layout Standard
27256 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27259 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27261 \begin_inset space ~
27269 arg "layout-paragraph"
27273 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27276 \begin_layout Subsection
27277 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27279 \begin_inset Index idx
27282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27283 Bibliography ! Databases
27289 \begin_inset Index idx
27292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27293 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27300 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27302 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27309 \begin_layout Standard
27310 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27316 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27318 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27319 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27324 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27326 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27327 your working field in a database.
27328 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27329 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27330 list for that document.
27331 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27335 \begin_layout Standard
27336 The database is a text file with the file extension
27337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27348 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27349 The format is explained in
27350 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27356 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27358 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27360 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27365 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27366 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27367 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27369 \begin_inset Flex URL
27372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27374 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27382 \begin_layout Standard
27383 To use a database, use the menu
27385 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27390 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27392 \begin_inset space ~
27398 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27399 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27406 Add bibliography to TOC
27408 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27413 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27414 in the document or just the cited references.
27417 \begin_layout Standard
27418 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27430 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27431 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27432 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27433 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27435 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27441 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27442 \begin_inset Newline newline
27446 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27448 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27460 \begin_layout Standard
27461 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27464 \begin_layout Standard
27465 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27466 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27468 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27475 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27476 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27481 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27482 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27483 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27487 The following variants are possible:
27490 \begin_layout Description
27491 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27492 with other bibliography packages (e.
27493 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27497 \begin_inset space \space{}
27504 ), only with the package
27508 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27512 \begin_layout Description
27513 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27514 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27515 with all bibliography packages, except
27520 \begin_layout Description
27521 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27526 , works with all bibliography packages
27529 \begin_layout Standard
27530 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27531 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27533 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27536 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27540 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27549 \begin_layout Standard
27550 When you select the option
27552 Sectioned bibliography
27556 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27557 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27560 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27561 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27563 Customizing Bibliographies
27567 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27572 Additional Features
27577 \begin_layout Standard
27578 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27579 the two methods of creating them.
27580 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27581 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27582 We used the style file
27586 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27589 \begin_layout Subsection
27591 \begin_inset Index idx
27594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27595 Bibliography ! Citation format
27603 \begin_layout Standard
27604 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27605 For this feature you need to enable the option
27611 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27615 \begin_inset Index idx
27618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27619 Document ! Settings
27629 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27630 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27631 style files as explained in
27632 the previous section.
27635 \begin_layout Standard
27636 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27637 the citation reference window.
27638 Here is an example where the text
27639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27643 \begin_inset space ~
27647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27650 appears after the reference:
27653 \begin_layout Standard
27655 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27658 key "latexcompanion"
27665 \begin_layout Section
27667 \begin_inset Index idx
27670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27677 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27686 \begin_layout Standard
27687 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27689 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27691 \begin_inset space ~
27696 or the toolbar button
27703 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27704 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27705 by \SpecialChar LyX
27706 as the index entry.
27709 \begin_layout Standard
27710 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27712 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27713 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27715 \begin_inset space ~
27721 A light blue box labeled
27722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27733 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27734 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27738 \begin_layout Standard
27739 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27740 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27741 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27742 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27744 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27746 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27753 \begin_layout Subsection
27754 Grouping Index Entries
27755 \begin_inset Index idx
27758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27767 \begin_layout Standard
27768 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27770 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27771 lists under the entry
27772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27780 First we create the entry
27781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27789 \begin_inset space ~
27793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27795 reference "subsec:Lists"
27800 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27801 \begin_inset space ~
27805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27807 reference "sec:Itemize"
27811 , we insert the command
27814 \begin_layout Standard
27820 \begin_layout Standard
27824 \begin_layout Standard
27830 \begin_layout Standard
27831 for the enumerated list in section
27832 \begin_inset space ~
27836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27838 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27845 \begin_layout Standard
27846 The exclamation mark
27847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27854 marks the grouping levels.
27855 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27856 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27857 If we don't have an index entry for
27858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27865 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27868 \begin_layout Subsection
27870 \begin_inset Index idx
27873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27874 Index ! Page ranges
27882 \begin_layout Standard
27883 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27885 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27886 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27887 an index entry in section
27888 \begin_inset space ~
27892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27894 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27901 \begin_layout Standard
27904 Paragraph environments|(
27907 \begin_layout Standard
27908 and another entry at the end of section
27909 \begin_inset space ~
27913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27915 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
27922 \begin_layout Standard
27925 Paragraph environments|)
27928 \begin_layout Standard
27930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27953 respectively start and end the index range.
27954 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27955 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27956 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27957 An example is the index entry
27958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27961 Document ! Settings
27962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27968 \begin_layout Subsection
27970 \begin_inset Index idx
27973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27974 Index ! Cross referencing
27982 \begin_layout Standard
27983 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27984 We referred for example in the index entry
27985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27993 \begin_inset space ~
27997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27999 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
28003 ) to the index entry
28004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28011 in the same section using the entry
28014 \begin_layout Standard
28017 GIF|see{Image formats}
28020 \begin_layout Standard
28021 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
28023 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
28024 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
28027 \begin_layout Subsection
28029 \begin_inset Index idx
28032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28033 Index ! Entry order
28041 \begin_layout Standard
28042 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
28043 follow the rules for the index order.
28044 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
28049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28050 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
28052 \begin_inset space ~
28056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28058 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28067 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
28068 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
28069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28093 \begin_inset Index idx
28096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28097 Dummy entries ! maïs
28103 \begin_inset Index idx
28106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28107 Dummy entries ! maître
28113 \begin_inset Index idx
28116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28117 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
28122 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28123 maïs, maison, maître.
28124 To achieve this, we use the command
28127 \begin_layout Standard
28130 previous entry@current entry
28133 \begin_layout Standard
28134 In our case we want to have
28135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28150 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28153 \begin_layout Standard
28159 \begin_layout Standard
28160 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28161 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
28163 See the next subsection for an example.
28166 \begin_layout Standard
28167 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28173 \begin_layout Standard
28174 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28179 to generate the index (see sec.
28180 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28186 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28195 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28196 -package aeguill in sec.
28197 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28203 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28207 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28208 -packages although all these index
28209 commands start with
28210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28223 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28228 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28231 \begin_layout Standard
28243 \begin_layout Standard
28255 \begin_layout Subsection
28257 \begin_inset Index idx
28260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28261 Index ! Entry layout
28269 \begin_layout Standard
28270 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28271 \begin_inset Index idx
28274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28277 This is an italic dummy entry
28282 You can also format the page number using the character
28283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28290 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28291 -command without a backslash.
28292 We can write for example
28295 \begin_layout Standard
28298 italic page number:|textit
28301 \begin_layout Standard
28302 to get the page number in italic.
28303 \begin_inset Index idx
28306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28307 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28312 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28313 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28331 \begin_inset space ~
28337 Have a look at section
28338 \begin_inset space ~
28342 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28344 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28348 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28352 \begin_layout Standard
28353 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28361 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28365 to generate the index, see sec.
28366 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28370 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28372 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28381 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28386 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28387 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28390 key "latexcompanion"
28402 \begin_layout Standard
28403 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28405 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28406 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28407 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28408 If so, put the following in the preamble
28411 \begin_layout Standard
28423 \begin_layout Standard
28427 \begin_layout Standard
28433 \begin_layout Standard
28434 in the index entry.
28435 \begin_inset Index idx
28438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28439 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28444 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28445 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28446 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28449 \begin_layout Standard
28450 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28451 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28452 a bold font for all index entries.
28453 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28465 documentation for details,
28466 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28468 key "makeindex,xindy"
28475 \begin_layout Subsection
28477 \begin_inset Index idx
28480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28487 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28489 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28496 \begin_layout Standard
28497 If the index generation program
28501 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28502 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28506 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28507 distribution, is used.
28511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28516 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28517 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28518 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28519 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28520 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28530 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28532 dialog, see section
28533 \begin_inset space ~
28537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28539 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28544 The available options are listed and explained in
28545 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28547 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
28552 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28556 \begin_layout Standard
28557 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28558 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28561 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28562 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28566 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28567 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28570 \begin_layout Subsection
28574 \begin_layout Standard
28575 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28576 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28584 next to the standard index.
28586 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28587 that add this feature.
28594 \begin_inset Index idx
28597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28599 -packages ! splitidx
28604 package to generate multiple indexes.
28605 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28611 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28613 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28620 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28621 style, but it also includes
28622 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28623 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28631 \begin_layout Standard
28632 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28633 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28635 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28636 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28639 and select the option
28641 Use multiple Indexes
28648 already contains the standard index
28649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28657 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28658 also appear as a heading) to the
28662 input field and press the
28667 The new index now also appears in the list.
28668 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28669 label color to the new index.
28672 \begin_layout Standard
28673 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28676 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28683 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28684 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28685 are additional features:
28688 \begin_layout Itemize
28689 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28690 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28693 \begin_layout Itemize
28694 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28695 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28703 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28704 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28705 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28706 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28709 \begin_layout Section
28710 Nomenclature/Glossary
28711 \begin_inset Index idx
28714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28721 \begin_inset Index idx
28724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28753 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28755 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28762 \begin_layout Standard
28763 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28764 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28765 called nomenclature or glossary.
28768 \begin_layout Standard
28769 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28776 \begin_inset Index idx
28779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28781 -packages ! nomencl
28787 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28789 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28795 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28799 \begin_layout Standard
28800 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28801 and then use the menu
28803 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28809 \begin_inset space ~
28814 or the toolbar button
28817 arg "nomencl-insert"
28822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28833 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28836 \begin_layout Standard
28837 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28838 The first is the term or
28842 that you wish to define.
28847 of the term or symbol.
28850 \begin_layout Standard
28851 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28859 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
28860 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28868 \begin_layout Subsection
28869 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28870 \begin_inset Index idx
28873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28874 Nomenclature ! Layout
28882 \begin_layout Standard
28883 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28887 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28894 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28902 \begin_inset Newline newline
28910 \begin_inset Newline newline
28916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28923 character starts/ends the formula.
28924 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
28925 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
28927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28937 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28947 \begin_layout Standard
28948 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28949 -syntax is given in section
28950 \begin_inset space ~
28954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28956 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28963 \begin_layout Standard
28967 \begin_inset space ~
28972 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28974 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28979 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28986 in this document is:
28987 \begin_inset Newline newline
28992 dummy entry for the character
28997 \begin_inset Newline newline
29009 \begin_inset space ~
29019 font use the command
29048 \begin_layout Standard
29049 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
29050 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29054 \begin_inset space \space{}
29058 \begin_inset Newline newline
29074 \begin_inset Newline newline
29077 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
29078 This command will make the font of all symbols
29085 \begin_inset space ~
29093 \begin_layout Standard
29094 If the characters |
29095 \begin_inset space \space{}
29099 \begin_inset space \space{}
29103 \begin_inset space \space{}
29107 \begin_inset space \space{}
29111 \begin_inset space \space{}
29114 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
29115 a quote character in front of them.
29116 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29117 LatexCommand nomenclature
29118 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
29119 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
29126 \begin_layout Subsection
29127 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
29128 \begin_inset Index idx
29131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29132 Nomenclature ! Sort order
29140 \begin_layout Standard
29141 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29142 -code of the symbol
29144 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
29146 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
29149 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29150 LatexCommand nomenclature
29152 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29159 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29163 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29164 LatexCommand nomenclature
29167 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29172 They will be sorted by
29173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29199 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29202 will be sorted before the
29206 since the character
29207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29214 is considered in sorting.
29217 \begin_layout Standard
29218 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29221 \begin_inset space ~
29226 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29227 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29229 For the example given, you can insert
29233 in this field for the
29234 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29241 will be located before
29242 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29248 \begin_layout Standard
29249 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29254 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29263 \begin_layout Subsection
29264 Nomenclature Options
29265 \begin_inset Index idx
29268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29269 Nomenclature ! Options
29277 \begin_layout Standard
29282 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29283 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29286 \begin_layout Description
29287 refeq Appends the phrase
29288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29303 to every nomenclature entry, where
29309 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29312 \begin_layout Description
29313 refpage Appends the phrase
29314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29329 to every nomenclature entry, where
29335 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29338 \begin_layout Description
29339 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29342 \begin_layout Standard
29343 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29344 class options list in the
29346 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29350 In this document the options
29357 \begin_layout Standard
29358 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29364 \begin_layout Standard
29365 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29366 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29371 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29374 \begin_layout Description
29384 \begin_layout Description
29387 nomrefpage Like the
29394 \begin_layout Description
29397 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29406 \begin_layout Description
29410 \begin_inset space ~
29416 \begin_inset space ~
29421 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29424 \begin_layout Standard
29426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29433 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29434 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29438 \begin_layout Standard
29446 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29449 \begin_inset Newline newline
29456 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29461 \begin_inset Newline newline
29465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29480 by their translation.
29483 \begin_layout Subsection
29484 Printing the Nomenclature
29485 \begin_inset Index idx
29488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29489 Nomenclature ! Printing
29497 \begin_layout Standard
29498 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29500 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29501 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29517 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29518 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29519 You can choose between these settings:
29522 \begin_layout Description
29523 Default a space of 1
29524 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29530 \begin_layout Description
29532 \begin_inset space ~
29536 \begin_inset space ~
29539 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29542 \begin_layout Description
29543 Custom custom space
29546 \begin_layout Standard
29547 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29556 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29564 For example, in order to change the name to
29568 , add the following line to the preamble:
29571 \begin_layout Standard
29579 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29582 \begin_layout Subsection
29583 Nomenclature Program
29584 \begin_inset Index idx
29587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29588 Nomenclature ! Program
29594 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29596 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29603 \begin_layout Standard
29609 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29610 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29612 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29617 by adding options, see section
29618 \begin_inset space ~
29622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29624 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29629 The available options are listed and explained in
29630 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29632 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29639 \begin_layout Section
29641 \begin_inset Index idx
29644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29651 \begin_inset Index idx
29654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29655 Document ! Branches
29661 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29663 name "sec:Branches"
29670 \begin_layout Standard
29671 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29672 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29673 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29674 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29677 \begin_layout Standard
29678 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29679 allows you to put text into branches.
29680 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29681 To create a branch, either select the menu
29683 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29684 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29687 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29689 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29696 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29697 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29698 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29699 and whether the name of the branch should
29700 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29701 (see below for an example).
29702 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29703 to the name of the other) and to add
29704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29712 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29716 \begin_inset space ~
29719 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29720 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29723 \begin_layout Standard
29724 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29725 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29727 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29730 where you can choose a branch.
29731 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29735 \begin_layout Standard
29736 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29737 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29740 \begin_layout Standard
29741 \begin_inset Branch Question
29744 \begin_layout Standard
29745 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29753 \begin_layout Standard
29754 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29757 \begin_layout Standard
29758 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29766 \begin_layout Standard
29773 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29774 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29777 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29778 Consider for example a file
29779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29786 which has the above branches.
29788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29795 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29819 branch were inactive,
29820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29835 branch was active, likewise
29836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29851 branch was active, and
29852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29855 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29859 if both branches were active.
29860 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29863 \begin_layout Standard
29864 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29870 \begin_layout Standard
29871 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29872 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29873 definitions for each branch.
29874 For example you can define for the question branch
29878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29879 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29880 -syntax, see section
29881 \begin_inset space ~
29885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29887 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29899 \begin_layout Standard
29909 \begin_layout Standard
29919 \begin_layout Standard
29920 and for the answer branch
29923 \begin_layout Standard
29933 \begin_layout Standard
29943 \begin_layout Standard
29944 \begin_inset Branch Question
29947 \begin_layout Standard
29951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29979 \begin_layout Standard
29980 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29983 \begin_layout Standard
29987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30015 \begin_layout Standard
30016 Now it is possible to use the
30020 question{\SpecialChar ldots
30027 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
30030 commands to obtain conditional output.
30031 Here is an example formula where only the
30038 \begin_inset Formula
30040 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
30048 \begin_layout Standard
30049 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
30057 \begin_layout Standard
30058 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
30060 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30064 \begin_inset space \space{}
30067 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
30069 For this advanced usage, see the
30075 Flex insets and InsetLayout
30080 \begin_layout Section
30082 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30084 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
30089 \begin_inset Index idx
30092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30101 \begin_layout Standard
30104 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30105 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30108 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
30110 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30116 \begin_inset Index idx
30119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30121 -packages ! hyperref
30126 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
30127 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
30128 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
30129 part of the document.
30133 \begin_layout Standard
30134 The header information in the dialog tab
30138 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
30139 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
30140 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
30141 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
30145 \begin_inset space ~
30149 \begin_inset space ~
30154 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
30155 tries to extract the header information from your document title
30156 and author entries.
30160 \begin_inset space ~
30164 \begin_inset space ~
30168 \begin_inset space ~
30173 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30176 \begin_layout Standard
30177 You can specify in the dialog tab
30181 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30186 \begin_inset space ~
30190 \begin_inset space ~
30194 \begin_inset space ~
30199 option allows long links to be split;
30202 \begin_inset space ~
30206 \begin_inset space ~
30210 \begin_inset space ~
30218 \begin_inset space ~
30223 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30226 \begin_inset space ~
30231 colors the different links.
30232 The default colors are:
30235 \begin_layout Labeling
30236 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30241 for hyperlinks and URLs
30244 \begin_layout Labeling
30245 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30253 \begin_layout Labeling
30254 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30262 \begin_layout Standard
30263 but you can change these in the field
30268 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30271 \begin_layout Standard
30274 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30277 \begin_layout Standard
30282 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30283 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30284 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30287 \begin_layout Standard
30292 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30293 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30294 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30304 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30305 when opening the PDF.
30307 \begin_inset space ~
30310 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30311 \begin_inset space ~
30314 1 will only display the sections.
30317 \begin_layout Standard
30318 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30319 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30325 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30326 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30335 \begin_layout Section
30337 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30339 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30341 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30348 \begin_layout Subsection
30351 \begin_inset Index idx
30354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30362 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30364 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30371 \begin_layout Standard
30372 As \SpecialChar LyX
30373 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30374 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30375 commands and constructs,
30378 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30379 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30380 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30381 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30382 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30383 cannot support all packages and
30387 \begin_layout Standard
30388 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30389 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30390 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30394 Code box is created by the menu
30396 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30398 \begin_inset space ~
30403 or by the toolbar button
30416 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30424 \begin_layout Standard
30425 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30427 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30429 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30430 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30437 , you can write the command part
30443 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30444 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30448 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30449 Code box behind the word.
30450 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30451 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30455 \begin_layout Standard
30456 \begin_inset Graphics
30457 filename clipart/ERT.png
30465 \begin_layout Standard
30469 \begin_layout Standard
30470 This is a line with a
30474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30497 \begin_layout Standard
30498 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30506 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30507 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30508 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30509 know that the command is finished.
30517 \begin_layout Subsection
30518 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30520 \begin_inset Argument 1
30523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30524 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30531 \begin_inset Index idx
30534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30542 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30544 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30551 \begin_layout Standard
30552 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30553 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30554 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30555 uses in the background.
30556 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30557 is based on commands, you can
30558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30566 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30567 any time if you know the right commands.
30568 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30569 is the end of the day.
30570 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30571 all caption labels bold.
30572 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30574 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30578 \begin_layout Standard
30579 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30581 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30583 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30586 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30595 \begin_layout Standard
30596 As result you find that the package
30601 \begin_inset Index idx
30604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30606 -packages ! caption
30612 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30614 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30617 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30621 \begin_inset space ~
30629 \begin_layout Standard
30634 usepackage[options]{package name}
30637 \begin_layout Standard
30638 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30639 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30640 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30641 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30644 \begin_layout Standard
30645 In your case the package name is
30650 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30655 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30656 So you add the command
30659 \begin_layout Standard
30664 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30667 \begin_layout Standard
30668 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30673 For more commands provided by the
30677 package, have a look at its documentation,
30678 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30692 \begin_layout Standard
30693 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30695 For example if you use a
30699 class, you don't need the package
30703 , you can instead write
30706 \begin_layout Standard
30711 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30716 \begin_layout Standard
30717 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30718 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30719 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30726 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30729 \begin_layout Standard
30730 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30731 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30733 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30734 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30735 Code box as described in the previous
30739 \begin_layout Standard
30740 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30741 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30744 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30746 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30753 \begin_layout Standard
30754 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30760 \begin_layout Standard
30764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30774 \begin_inset Note Note
30777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30778 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30786 \begin_layout Left Header
30787 \begin_inset Argument 1
30790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30810 \begin_inset Note Note
30813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30814 defines the header line as described below
30822 \begin_layout Center Header
30823 \begin_inset Argument 1
30826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30835 \begin_layout Right Header
30836 \begin_inset Argument 1
30839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30860 \begin_layout Left Footer
30861 \begin_inset Argument 1
30864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30885 \begin_layout Center Footer
30886 \begin_inset Argument 1
30889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30901 \begin_inset Newline newline
30905 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30911 \begin_layout Right Footer
30912 \begin_inset Argument 1
30915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30937 \begin_layout Section
30938 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30939 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30941 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30946 \begin_inset Index idx
30949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30950 Document ! Header/Footer line
30956 \begin_inset Index idx
30959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30968 \begin_layout Standard
30969 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30973 \begin_inset space ~
30984 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30990 \begin_inset space ~
30996 As a second step add in the menu
30998 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30999 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31006 Custom Header/Footerlines
31007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31011 This module offers the following 6
31012 \begin_inset space ~
31018 \begin_layout Description
31020 \begin_inset space ~
31024 \begin_inset space ~
31028 \begin_inset space ~
31032 \begin_inset space ~
31036 \begin_inset space ~
31042 \begin_layout Description
31044 \begin_inset space ~
31048 \begin_inset space ~
31052 \begin_inset space ~
31056 \begin_inset space ~
31060 \begin_inset space ~
31066 \begin_layout Standard
31067 for the different positions in the header/footer.
31070 \begin_layout Standard
31071 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
31072 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
31074 \begin_inset space ~
31078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31080 reference "fig:Page-layout"
31084 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
31087 \begin_layout Standard
31088 \begin_inset Float figure
31094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31097 \begin_inset Tabular
31098 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
31099 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
31100 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31101 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31102 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31104 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
31116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31122 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31133 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31151 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31162 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
31165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31166 The normal text on the page goes here.
31167 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31169 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31170 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
31175 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31184 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31195 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31213 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31224 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31242 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31260 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31263 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31265 name "fig:Page-layout"
31269 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31282 \begin_layout Standard
31283 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31291 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31295 \begin_inset space ~
31300 is set to “Default”.
31301 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31310 \begin_layout Subsection
31314 \begin_layout Standard
31315 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31316 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31317 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31318 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31320 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31321 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31324 \begin_layout Standard
31325 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31326 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31330 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31332 \begin_inset space ~
31340 \begin_layout Description
31343 thepage prints the current page number
31346 \begin_layout Description
31349 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31352 \begin_layout Description
31355 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31358 \begin_layout Description
31361 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31362 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31369 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31372 because it usually goes in a left header.
31375 \begin_layout Description
31378 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31379 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31381 It is normally used in the right header.
31384 \begin_layout Subsection
31385 Default header/footer
31388 \begin_layout Standard
31389 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31390 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31391 footer has the page number.
31392 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31393 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31394 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31397 \begin_inset space ~
31405 \begin_layout Subsection
31409 \begin_layout Standard
31410 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31411 Some pages are different.
31412 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31413 a new part or chapter in your book.
31414 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31415 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31416 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31419 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31420 Header and footer decoration line
31423 \begin_layout Standard
31424 By default, you get a 0.4
31425 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31428 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31429 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31441 in the following way:
31444 \begin_layout Standard
31451 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31454 \begin_layout Standard
31455 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31464 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31465 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31471 \begin_layout Standard
31472 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31474 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
31475 \begin_inset space ~
31479 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31488 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31489 Several header/footer lines
31492 \begin_layout Standard
31493 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31494 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31495 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31497 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31512 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31513 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31515 \begin_inset space ~
31523 \begin_layout Standard
31530 headheight}{height}
31533 \begin_layout Standard
31534 where height is a size in standard units.
31535 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31536 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31537 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31538 logfile with the menu
31540 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31546 \begin_inset space ~
31551 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31556 \begin_inset Index idx
31559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31561 -packages ! fancyhdr
31567 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31568 for your header/footer.
31571 \begin_layout Subsection
31575 \begin_layout Standard
31576 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31577 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31578 This example consists of the following definition:
31581 \begin_layout Description
31583 \begin_inset space ~
31592 , empty optional argument
31595 \begin_layout Description
31597 \begin_inset space ~
31600 Header empty, empty optional argument
31603 \begin_layout Description
31605 \begin_inset space ~
31614 in the optional argument
31617 \begin_layout Description
31619 \begin_inset space ~
31628 in the optional argument
31631 \begin_layout Description
31633 \begin_inset space ~
31646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31650 \begin_inset Newline newline
31654 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31661 in the optional argument
31664 \begin_layout Description
31666 \begin_inset space ~
31675 , empty optional argument
31678 \begin_layout Description
31681 headrulewidth set to 2
31682 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31688 \begin_layout Standard
31689 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31690 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31696 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31705 \begin_layout Standard
31706 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31712 \begin_layout Standard
31716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31720 pagestyle{headings}
31726 \begin_inset Note Note
31729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31730 switches back to page style with the default headings
31738 \begin_layout Section
31739 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31740 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31742 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31747 \begin_inset Index idx
31750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31757 \begin_inset Index idx
31760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31769 \begin_layout Standard
31771 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31772 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31773 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31776 \begin_layout Subsection
31780 \begin_layout Standard
31781 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31787 \begin_inset Index idx
31790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31792 -packages ! preview-latex
31797 (on some systems named simply
31802 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31804 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31810 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31812 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31820 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31821 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31822 -package are automatically
31823 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
31827 \begin_layout Subsection
31831 \begin_layout Standard
31832 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31833 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31835 activate the option
31838 \begin_inset space ~
31845 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31851 \begin_inset space ~
31855 \begin_inset space ~
31858 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
31865 \begin_inset space ~
31878 \begin_inset space ~
31883 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31886 \begin_layout Standard
31887 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31892 \begin_inset space ~
31900 \begin_inset space ~
31908 \begin_layout Standard
31909 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
31910 and when you finish
31914 \begin_layout Standard
31915 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31923 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31924 generated by activating the option
31927 \begin_inset space ~
31933 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31941 \begin_layout Subsection
31942 Selected document parts
31945 \begin_layout Standard
31946 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31947 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
31948 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
31949 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31951 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31953 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31957 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31958 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31959 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31962 \begin_layout Standard
31963 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31970 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31982 is explained in section
31984 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31989 \begin_inset space ~
31999 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
32000 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
32001 the final rotated boxes,
32002 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
32003 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
32005 Here is the result:
32008 \begin_layout Standard
32009 \begin_inset Preview
32011 \begin_layout Standard
32016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32020 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
32026 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
32036 height_special "totalheight"
32041 backgroundcolor "none"
32044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32069 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
32075 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
32082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32097 \begin_layout Standard
32098 Previewing works also for colors.
32099 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32118 is explained in section
32125 \begin_inset space ~
32138 \begin_layout Standard
32139 \begin_inset Preview
32141 \begin_layout Standard
32145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32164 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32169 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32188 \begin_layout Standard
32189 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32195 \begin_layout Standard
32196 If \SpecialChar LyX
32197 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32198 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32199 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32200 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32201 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32202 the \SpecialChar TeX
32204 If \SpecialChar LyX
32205 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32206 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32208 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32209 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32210 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32213 \begin_layout Subsection
32218 \begin_layout Standard
32219 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32220 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32223 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32225 \begin_inset space ~
32230 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32232 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32234 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32235 's main window, then only this selection
32236 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32237 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32238 the source view window.
32243 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32244 ; but note that if you have
32245 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32247 not just the one which is open at the time.
32250 \begin_layout Section
32251 Advanced Find and Replace
32252 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32254 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32259 \begin_inset Index idx
32262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32269 \begin_inset Index idx
32272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32281 \begin_layout Subsection
32285 \begin_layout Standard
32286 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32287 allows for searching of complex,
32288 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32290 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32291 The key-features are:
32294 \begin_layout Itemize
32295 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32296 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32297 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32301 \begin_layout Itemize
32302 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32303 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32304 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32305 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32308 \begin_layout Itemize
32309 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32310 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32311 outside of mathematics environments
32314 \begin_layout Itemize
32315 Search may be widened to a specific
32320 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32324 \begin_inset space ~
32327 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32328 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32335 \begin_layout Itemize
32336 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32337 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32338 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32342 \begin_inset space ~
32345 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32348 \begin_layout Subsection
32352 \begin_layout Standard
32353 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32355 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32368 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32371 ) or the toolbar button
32374 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32380 Advanced Find and Replace
32385 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32389 \begin_layout Standard
32395 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32399 \begin_inset space ~
32404 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32407 arg "paragraph-break"
32411 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32412 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32416 arg "paragraph-break"
32419 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32423 searches backwards.
32426 \begin_layout Standard
32430 \begin_inset space ~
32435 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32444 \begin_inset space ~
32449 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32452 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32453 Searching for mathematics
32456 \begin_layout Standard
32457 Mathematical formulas, such as
32458 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32461 or something more complex like
32462 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32465 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32470 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32471 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32472 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32473 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32479 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32483 \begin_layout Standard
32484 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32485 This is done by switching to the
32489 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32494 This way, entering in the
32501 \begin_layout Itemize
32502 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32503 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32506 \begin_layout Itemize
32507 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32508 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32511 \begin_layout Itemize
32512 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32513 of it only within section headings.
32514 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32515 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32519 \begin_layout Itemize
32520 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32521 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32524 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32528 \begin_layout Standard
32529 The entries made in the
32533 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32536 \begin_inset space ~
32542 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32546 button or alternatively press
32549 arg "paragraph-break"
32556 while the cursor is in the
32559 \begin_inset space ~
32567 \begin_layout Standard
32568 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32570 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32574 \begin_layout Itemize
32575 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32576 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32584 with its typewriter version
32585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32599 \begin_layout Itemize
32600 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32606 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32618 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32625 (you may want to enable the
32628 \begin_inset space ~
32636 \begin_inset space ~
32641 options and disable the
32649 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32657 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32658 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32662 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32665 , or occurrences of
32666 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32670 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32676 \begin_layout Subsection
32680 \begin_layout Standard
32681 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32686 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32688 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32690 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32699 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32705 This is done with the context menu
32707 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32708 Insert Regular Expression
32710 while the cursor is in the
32715 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32716 expression matching rules
32720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32721 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32724 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32728 \begin_inset space ~
32731 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32732 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32738 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32739 same text in the document.
32740 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32741 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32744 \begin_layout Enumerate
32745 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32750 editor the fraction
32751 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32755 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32758 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32759 fractions with the given denominator.
32762 \begin_layout Enumerate
32763 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32775 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32780 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32781 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32782 Also, by inserting a
32783 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32786 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32787 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32790 \begin_layout Standard
32791 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32792 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32793 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32796 , and referring back to them through
32797 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32801 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32805 For example, try searching with the regexp
32806 \begin_inset Newline newline
32809 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32812 \begin_inset Newline newline
32815 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32818 \begin_layout Standard
32819 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32822 \begin_layout Standard
32823 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32831 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32832 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32833 sub-expressions is absolute.
32835 \begin_inset space ~
32839 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32842 always refers to the first occurrence of
32843 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32846 in all entered regexps.
32854 \begin_layout Section
32856 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32858 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32863 \begin_inset Index idx
32866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32875 \begin_layout Standard
32877 has a built-in spell checker.
32880 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32887 key or the toolbar button
32890 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32893 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32894 beginning of the currently selected text.
32895 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32896 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32897 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32898 scrolled so that it is visible.
32899 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32900 n, if any could be found.
32901 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32905 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32906 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32909 \begin_layout Standard
32910 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32913 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32917 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32918 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32920 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32921 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32924 \begin_inset space ~
32932 arg "dialog-show character"
32935 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32937 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32940 \begin_layout Standard
32941 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32942 can be downloaded from here:
32943 \begin_inset Newline newline
32947 \begin_inset Flex URL
32950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32952 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32958 \begin_inset Newline newline
32962 \begin_inset space ~
32965 files for each language.
32966 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32967 \begin_inset space ~
32970 files into \SpecialChar LyX
32971 's installation subfolder
32979 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
32981 \begin_inset Newline newline
32984 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32985 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32986 but in most cases these are
33002 is the language code.
33005 \begin_layout Subsection
33009 \begin_layout Standard
33012 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33013 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33015 \begin_inset space ~
33018 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33021 you can set the following things:
33024 \begin_layout Description
33026 \begin_inset space ~
33029 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
33030 should use for spell checking.
33031 Depending on your platform,
33045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33046 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
33047 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
33062 \begin_inset space ~
33065 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
33068 \begin_layout Description
33070 \begin_inset space ~
33073 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
33074 will always use the given language
33075 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
33078 \begin_layout Description
33080 \begin_inset space ~
33083 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
33085 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33089 \begin_inset space \space{}
33093 This should normally not be needed.
33096 \begin_layout Description
33098 \begin_inset space ~
33102 \begin_inset space ~
33105 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
33107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33117 \begin_layout Description
33119 \begin_inset space ~
33122 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
33123 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
33124 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
33125 appear in a context menu.
33126 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
33130 \begin_layout Description
33132 \begin_inset space ~
33136 \begin_inset space ~
33140 \begin_inset space ~
33143 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
33147 \begin_layout Section
33149 \begin_inset Index idx
33152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33159 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33161 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33168 \begin_layout Standard
33170 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33171 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33181 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33183 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33192 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33194 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33195 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33196 which are available for many languages.
33199 \begin_layout Standard
33200 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33201 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33205 \begin_layout Subsection
33206 Setting up the thesaurus
33209 \begin_layout Standard
33218 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33222 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33227 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33229 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33233 \begin_inset space ~
33241 For instance, the US English files are named:
33244 \begin_layout Itemize
33248 \begin_layout Itemize
33252 \begin_layout Standard
33261 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33262 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33265 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33266 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33267 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33269 \begin_inset space ~
33274 ) to the path where they are installed.
33278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33279 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33280 ies, typical locations are
33286 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33290 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33294 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33297 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33303 LibreOffice-<Version>
33310 On the Mac, the default location is
33312 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33313 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33314 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33315 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33316 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33317 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33325 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33326 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33327 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33331 \begin_layout Standard
33332 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33333 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33337 \begin_layout Itemize
33338 \begin_inset Flex URL
33341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33343 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33351 \begin_layout Standard
33352 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33353 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33355 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33356 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33357 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33359 \begin_inset space ~
33364 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33366 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33367 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33371 \begin_layout Standard
33372 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33374 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33377 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33383 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33386 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33387 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33389 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33395 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33396 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33397 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33399 \begin_inset space ~
33404 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33407 \begin_layout Subsection
33408 Using the thesaurus
33411 \begin_layout Standard
33412 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33414 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33417 or the toolbar button
33420 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33423 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33425 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33427 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33428 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33429 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33438 ), related terms (such as
33441 \begin_inset space ~
33450 ), compounds (such as
33453 \begin_inset space ~
33462 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33471 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33474 \begin_layout Standard
33475 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33476 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33480 \begin_layout Standard
33481 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33482 the dictionary, such as the above
33486 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33487 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33491 \begin_inset space \space{}
33494 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33495 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33496 For example, looking up the word form
33500 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33505 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33506 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33510 \begin_inset space \space{}
33521 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33522 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33523 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33526 \begin_layout Section
33528 \begin_inset Index idx
33531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33538 \begin_inset Index idx
33541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33542 Document ! Change Tracking
33548 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33550 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33557 \begin_layout Standard
33558 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33559 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33560 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33561 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33563 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33565 \begin_inset space ~
33568 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33570 \begin_inset space ~
33578 \begin_layout Standard
33579 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33593 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33594 You can change the color in
33596 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33597 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33599 \begin_inset space ~
33603 \begin_inset space ~
33608 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33614 \begin_inset Index idx
33617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33618 Color ! Change tracking
33623 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33624 's status bar when the
33625 cursor is in changed text.
33626 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33629 arg "changes-merge"
33635 \begin_layout Standard
33636 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33638 \begin_inset Index idx
33641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33650 \begin_layout Standard
33651 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33657 \begin_layout Standard
33658 \begin_inset Graphics
33659 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33667 \begin_layout Standard
33668 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33674 \begin_layout Standard
33675 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33678 \begin_layout Standard
33679 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33685 \begin_layout Standard
33686 \begin_inset Tabular
33687 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33688 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33689 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33690 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33691 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33700 arg "changes-track"
33708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33714 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33716 \begin_inset space ~
33719 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33721 \begin_inset space ~
33730 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33739 arg "changes-output"
33747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33753 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33755 \begin_inset space ~
33758 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33760 \begin_inset space ~
33764 \begin_inset space ~
33768 \begin_inset space ~
33777 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33798 Jumps to the next change
33804 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33813 arg "change-accept"
33821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33827 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33829 \begin_inset space ~
33832 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33834 \begin_inset space ~
33843 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33852 arg "change-reject"
33860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33866 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33868 \begin_inset space ~
33871 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33873 \begin_inset space ~
33882 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33891 arg "changes-merge"
33899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33905 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33907 \begin_inset space ~
33910 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33912 \begin_inset space ~
33921 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33930 arg "all-changes-accept"
33938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33944 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33946 \begin_inset space ~
33949 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33951 \begin_inset space ~
33955 \begin_inset space ~
33964 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33973 arg "all-changes-reject"
33981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33987 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33989 \begin_inset space ~
33992 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33994 \begin_inset space ~
33998 \begin_inset space ~
34007 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34030 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34031 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
34033 \begin_inset space ~
34042 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34065 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
34067 \begin_inset space ~
34083 \begin_layout Standard
34084 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34090 \begin_layout Standard
34091 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
34111 \begin_layout Standard
34112 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
34113 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
34114 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
34115 the next change after the current cursor position.
34116 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
34117 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
34118 step to the next change.
34119 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
34122 \begin_layout Standard
34123 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
34124 to describe a change.
34127 \begin_layout Standard
34128 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34134 \begin_inset Index idx
34137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34139 -packages ! dvipost
34145 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34147 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34153 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34157 \begin_layout Section
34158 Comparison of Documents
34159 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34161 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
34166 \begin_inset Index idx
34169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34170 Comparison of documents
34178 \begin_layout Standard
34179 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34182 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34186 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34187 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34189 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34191 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34195 \begin_inset space ~
34199 \begin_inset space ~
34203 \begin_inset space ~
34212 \begin_inset space ~
34216 \begin_inset space ~
34220 \begin_inset space ~
34224 \begin_inset space ~
34228 \begin_inset space ~
34232 \begin_inset space ~
34237 enables the change tracking option
34240 \begin_inset space ~
34244 \begin_inset space ~
34248 \begin_inset space ~
34253 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34256 \begin_layout Section
34257 International Support
34258 \begin_inset Index idx
34261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34262 International support
34270 \begin_layout Standard
34271 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34272 with any language you want.
34273 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34274 up \SpecialChar LyX
34276 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34278 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34285 \begin_layout Standard
34286 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34287 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34288 \begin_inset space ~
34292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34294 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34301 \begin_layout Subsection
34303 \begin_inset Index idx
34306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34313 \begin_inset Index idx
34316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34317 Document ! Settings
34323 \begin_inset Index idx
34326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34327 Document ! Language
34335 \begin_layout Standard
34338 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34339 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34342 dialog lets you set
34344 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34349 \begin_layout Standard
34354 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34359 \begin_inset space ~
34364 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34365 For details about the different encoding options see section
34366 \begin_inset space ~
34370 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34372 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34379 \begin_layout Subsection
34380 Keyboard mapping configuration
34381 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34383 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34390 \begin_layout Standard
34391 If you have for example a U.
34392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34395 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34396 can use an alternate keymap.
34397 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34402 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34403 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34404 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34407 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34408 \begin_inset space ~
34412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34414 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34419 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34420 which one you want to use.
34423 \begin_layout Standard
34424 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34425 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34426 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34427 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34430 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34431 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34432 one to support the characters you want.
34433 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34440 \begin_layout Chapter
34443 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34445 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34452 \begin_layout Standard
34453 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34454 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34455 topic inside the user's guide.
34458 \begin_layout Section
34460 \begin_inset Index idx
34463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34472 \begin_layout Standard
34477 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34480 \begin_layout Subsection
34484 \begin_layout Standard
34485 Creates a new document.
34488 \begin_layout Subsection
34492 \begin_layout Standard
34493 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34494 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34495 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34498 \begin_layout Subsection
34502 \begin_layout Standard
34506 \begin_layout Subsection
34510 \begin_layout Standard
34511 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34512 Click there on a file to open it.
34515 \begin_layout Subsection
34519 \begin_layout Standard
34520 Closes the current document.
34523 \begin_layout Subsection
34527 \begin_layout Standard
34528 Closes all opened documents.
34531 \begin_layout Subsection
34535 \begin_layout Standard
34536 Saves the actual document.
34539 \begin_layout Subsection
34543 \begin_layout Standard
34544 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34547 \begin_layout Subsection
34551 \begin_layout Standard
34552 Saves all opened documents.
34555 \begin_layout Subsection
34559 \begin_layout Standard
34560 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34563 \begin_layout Subsection
34567 \begin_layout Standard
34568 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34569 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34570 It is described in the section
34572 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34577 Additional Features
34582 \begin_layout Subsection
34586 \begin_layout Standard
34587 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34588 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34590 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34591 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34595 \begin_layout Standard
34596 When using the menu entry
34599 \begin_inset space ~
34604 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34608 \begin_inset space ~
34612 \begin_inset space ~
34616 \begin_inset space ~
34621 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34622 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34625 \begin_layout Subsection
34627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34629 name "subsec:Export"
34636 \begin_layout Standard
34637 You can export your document to various file formats.
34638 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34640 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34641 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34642 during its configuration.
34645 \begin_layout Standard
34646 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34648 \begin_inset space ~
34652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34654 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34661 \begin_layout Description
34667 \begin_inset space ~
34670 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34672 \begin_inset space ~
34675 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34676 \begin_inset Newline newline
34679 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34680 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34684 \begin_layout Description
34685 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34691 \begin_layout Description
34693 \begin_inset space ~
34696 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34702 \begin_layout Description
34703 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34704 's native DVI-format.
34705 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34706 files paths or file names in your document.
34708 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34715 \begin_layout Description
34716 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34717 in files paths or file names
34720 \begin_layout Description
34722 \begin_inset space ~
34729 ) DVI-format using the program
34731 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34734 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34738 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34746 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34754 \begin_layout Description
34756 \begin_inset space ~
34759 (cropped) the same as
34763 but with cropped page margins.
34766 \begin_layout Description
34768 \begin_inset space ~
34771 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34775 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34780 \begin_layout Description
34784 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34792 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34800 \begin_layout Description
34802 \begin_inset space ~
34806 \begin_inset space ~
34809 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34813 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34821 \begin_layout Description
34825 \begin_inset space ~
34834 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34835 source that is compilable with the program
34837 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34841 \begin_layout Description
34845 \begin_inset space ~
34850 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34851 source, additionally all images used in the document
34852 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34856 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34859 \begin_layout Description
34863 \begin_inset space ~
34868 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34869 source code, additionally all images used in the document
34870 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
34878 \begin_layout Description
34882 \begin_inset space ~
34891 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34892 source that is compilable with the program
34898 \begin_layout Description
34900 \begin_inset space ~
34904 \begin_inset space ~
34911 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34912 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
34918 \begin_layout Description
34920 \begin_inset space ~
34923 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
34924 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
34926 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34930 \begin_inset space \space{}
34935 \begin_inset space ~
34939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34954 represent the version number)
34957 \begin_layout Description
34959 \begin_inset space ~
34963 \begin_inset space ~
34966 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34967 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34968 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34972 \begin_layout Description
34973 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
34974 's internal XHTML engine
34977 \begin_layout Description
34979 \begin_inset space ~
34983 \begin_inset space ~
34987 \begin_inset space ~
34991 \begin_inset space ~
34994 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
34999 For the conversion the program
35008 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35011 \begin_layout Description
35012 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
35017 \begin_layout Description
35019 \begin_inset space ~
35022 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
35024 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
35027 For the conversion the program
35036 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35039 \begin_layout Description
35041 \begin_inset space ~
35044 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
35045 For the conversion the program
35054 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35057 \begin_layout Description
35059 \begin_inset space ~
35062 (cropped) the same as
35065 \begin_inset space ~
35070 but with cropped page margins
35073 \begin_layout Description
35077 \begin_inset space ~
35082 PDF-format using the program
35086 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35089 \begin_layout Description
35093 \begin_inset space ~
35097 \begin_inset space ~
35105 \begin_inset space ~
35110 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
35111 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35115 \begin_inset space \space{}
35118 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
35122 \begin_layout Description
35126 \begin_inset space ~
35131 PDF-format using the program
35133 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35136 , produces PDF-files directly
35139 \begin_layout Description
35143 \begin_inset space ~
35148 PDF-format using the program
35152 , produces PDF-files directly
35155 \begin_layout Description
35159 \begin_inset space ~
35164 PDF-format using the program
35168 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35171 \begin_layout Description
35175 \begin_inset space ~
35180 PDF-format using the program
35185 , produces PDF-files directly
35188 \begin_layout Description
35192 \begin_inset space ~
35200 \begin_layout Description
35204 \begin_inset space ~
35208 \begin_inset space ~
35213 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35214 and then exported as text using the program
35219 \begin_layout Description
35224 PostScript format using the program
35229 \begin_layout Description
35230 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35231 source and also code in the statistical programming
35245 it is possible to use
35249 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35253 \begin_layout Standard
35254 If one of the menu entries
35261 \begin_inset space ~
35270 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35272 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35274 \begin_inset space ~
35278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35280 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35285 \begin_inset Index idx
35288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35289 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35298 \begin_layout Subsection
35302 \begin_layout Standard
35303 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35304 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35307 \begin_inset space ~
35311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35313 reference "sec:Paths"
35318 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35327 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35328 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35329 's preferences as described in section
35330 \begin_inset space ~
35334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35336 reference "subsec:Converters"
35343 \begin_layout Subsection
35344 New and Close Window
35347 \begin_layout Standard
35348 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35352 \begin_layout Subsection
35356 \begin_layout Standard
35357 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35360 \begin_layout Section
35362 \begin_inset Index idx
35365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35374 \begin_layout Subsection
35378 \begin_layout Standard
35379 Described in section
35380 \begin_inset space ~
35384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35386 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35393 \begin_layout Subsection
35394 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35397 \begin_layout Standard
35398 Described in section
35399 \begin_inset space ~
35403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35405 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35412 \begin_layout Subsection
35416 \begin_layout Standard
35417 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35418 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35421 \begin_layout Subsection
35425 \begin_layout Standard
35426 Selects the whole document.
35429 \begin_layout Subsection
35430 Find & Replace (Quick)
35433 \begin_layout Standard
35434 Described in section
35435 \begin_inset space ~
35439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35441 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35448 \begin_layout Subsection
35449 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35452 \begin_layout Standard
35453 Described in section
35454 \begin_inset space ~
35458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35460 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35467 \begin_layout Subsection
35468 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35471 \begin_layout Standard
35472 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35476 \begin_layout Subsection
35480 \begin_layout Standard
35481 Described in section
35482 \begin_inset space ~
35486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35488 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35495 \begin_layout Subsection
35497 \begin_inset Index idx
35500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35501 Paragraph ! Settings
35509 \begin_layout Standard
35510 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35511 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35515 \begin_layout Standard
35516 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35517 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35523 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35524 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35526 \begin_inset space ~
35534 \begin_layout Subsection
35538 \begin_layout Standard
35539 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35540 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35541 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35545 \begin_layout Standard
35546 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35548 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35549 The properties of tables are described in section
35550 \begin_inset space ~
35554 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35556 reference "sec:Tables"
35560 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35561 \begin_inset space ~
35565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35567 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35574 \begin_layout Subsection
35575 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35578 \begin_layout Standard
35579 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35581 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35582 \begin_inset space ~
35586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35588 reference "sec:Nesting"
35593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35595 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35602 \begin_layout Subsection
35605 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35608 \begin_layout Standard
35609 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35610 nts of the same type.
35612 \begin_inset space ~
35616 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35618 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35622 for an explanation.
35625 \begin_layout Section
35627 \begin_inset Index idx
35630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35639 \begin_layout Standard
35640 At the bottom of the
35644 menu the opened documents are listed.
35647 \begin_layout Subsection
35648 Open/Close all Insets
35651 \begin_layout Standard
35652 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35655 \begin_layout Subsection
35656 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35659 \begin_layout Standard
35660 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35663 \begin_layout Standard
35664 Math macros are described in the
35671 \begin_layout Subsection
35675 \begin_layout Standard
35676 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35677 \begin_inset space ~
35681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35683 reference "sec:Navigating"
35688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35690 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35697 \begin_layout Subsection
35701 \begin_layout Standard
35702 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35704 \begin_inset space ~
35708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35710 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35717 \begin_layout Subsection
35721 \begin_layout Standard
35722 Opens a window showing console messages.
35723 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
35725 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35728 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35729 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
35730 is processing the document.
35733 \begin_layout Subsection
35735 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35737 name "subsec:Toolbars"
35742 \begin_inset Index idx
35745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35754 \begin_layout Standard
35755 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35756 All toolbars and the
35759 \begin_inset space ~
35764 can be turned on and off.
35769 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35781 \begin_inset space ~
35793 \begin_inset space ~
35798 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35802 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35809 \begin_layout Standard
35814 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35818 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35819 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35820 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35821 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35822 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35825 \begin_layout Standard
35827 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35828 \begin_inset space ~
35832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35834 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35841 \begin_layout Subsection
35845 \begin_layout Standard
35849 \begin_inset space ~
35853 \begin_inset space ~
35857 \begin_inset space ~
35861 \begin_inset space ~
35865 \begin_inset space ~
35869 \begin_inset space ~
35874 will split \SpecialChar LyX
35875 's main window vertically while
35878 \begin_inset space ~
35882 \begin_inset space ~
35886 \begin_inset space ~
35890 \begin_inset space ~
35894 \begin_inset space ~
35898 \begin_inset space ~
35903 will split it horizontally.
35904 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35905 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35906 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35907 three or more documents at the same time.
35908 To close a split view, use the menu
35911 \begin_inset space ~
35915 \begin_inset space ~
35923 \begin_layout Subsection
35927 \begin_layout Standard
35928 Closes a split view.
35931 \begin_layout Subsection
35935 \begin_layout Standard
35936 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35937 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35938 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
35939 's main window fullscreen.
35940 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35941 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35944 \begin_layout Section
35946 \begin_inset Index idx
35949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35958 \begin_layout Subsection
35962 \begin_layout Standard
35963 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35964 \begin_inset space ~
35968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35970 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35981 \begin_layout Subsection
35983 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35985 name "subsec:Special-Character"
35992 \begin_layout Standard
35993 Here you can insert the following characters:
35996 \begin_layout Description
36001 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
36004 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
36005 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36006 -packages you have installed.
36007 You can get a complete display by checking
36010 \begin_inset space ~
36016 \begin_inset Newline newline
36020 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36028 Not all characters will be visible in the
36032 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
36034 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36040 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
36044 ) can display every character.
36052 \begin_layout Description
36053 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
36057 \begin_layout Description
36059 \begin_inset space ~
36063 \begin_inset space ~
36066 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
36067 \begin_inset space ~
36071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36073 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
36080 \begin_layout Description
36082 \begin_inset space ~
36085 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
36088 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36089 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36095 \begin_layout Description
36097 \begin_inset space ~
36100 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
36103 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36104 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36110 \begin_layout Description
36112 \begin_inset space ~
36115 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
36119 \begin_layout Description
36121 \begin_inset space ~
36124 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
36128 \begin_layout Description
36130 \begin_inset space ~
36133 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
36139 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36145 \begin_layout Description
36147 \begin_inset space ~
36150 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
36154 \begin_layout Description
36156 \begin_inset space ~
36160 \begin_inset Index idx
36163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36170 \begin_inset Index idx
36173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36174 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36179 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36180 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36182 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36188 \begin_inset Index idx
36191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36199 \begin_inset Newline newline
36202 More information about this feature can be found in the
36208 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36214 \begin_layout Description
36215 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
36217 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
36218 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
36222 \begin_layout Subsection
36226 \begin_layout Standard
36227 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36230 \begin_layout Description
36231 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36232 \begin_inset script superscript
36234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36243 \begin_layout Description
36244 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36245 \begin_inset script subscript
36247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36256 \begin_layout Description
36258 \begin_inset space ~
36261 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36262 \begin_inset space ~
36266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36268 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
36275 \begin_layout Description
36277 \begin_inset space ~
36280 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36281 \begin_inset space ~
36285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36287 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36294 \begin_layout Description
36296 \begin_inset space ~
36299 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36300 \begin_inset space ~
36304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36306 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36313 \begin_layout Description
36315 \begin_inset space ~
36318 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36320 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36324 \begin_inset space \space{}
36327 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36328 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36337 To insert a fraction use the command
36342 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36346 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36355 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36362 \begin_layout Description
36364 \begin_inset space ~
36367 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36368 \begin_inset space ~
36372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36374 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36381 \begin_layout Description
36383 \begin_inset space ~
36386 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36387 \begin_inset space ~
36391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36393 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36400 \begin_layout Description
36402 \begin_inset space ~
36405 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36406 \begin_inset space ~
36410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36412 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36419 \begin_layout Description
36420 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36421 \begin_inset space ~
36425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36427 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36434 \begin_layout Description
36436 \begin_inset space ~
36439 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36440 \begin_inset space ~
36444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36446 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36453 \begin_layout Description
36455 \begin_inset space ~
36458 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36459 \begin_inset space ~
36463 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36465 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36472 \begin_layout Description
36474 \begin_inset space ~
36478 \begin_inset space ~
36481 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36482 \begin_inset space ~
36486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36488 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36495 \begin_layout Description
36497 \begin_inset space ~
36500 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36501 as described in section
36502 \begin_inset space ~
36506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36508 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36515 \begin_layout Description
36517 \begin_inset space ~
36520 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36521 \begin_inset space ~
36525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36527 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36534 \begin_layout Description
36536 \begin_inset space ~
36539 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36540 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36542 \begin_inset space ~
36546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36548 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36555 \begin_layout Description
36557 \begin_inset space ~
36560 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36561 \begin_inset space ~
36565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36567 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36574 \begin_layout Description
36576 \begin_inset space ~
36580 \begin_inset space ~
36583 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36584 \begin_inset space ~
36588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36590 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36597 \begin_layout Subsection
36601 \begin_layout Standard
36602 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36606 \begin_inset space ~
36627 are described in section
36628 \begin_inset space ~
36632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36634 reference "sec:toc"
36643 is described in section
36644 \begin_inset space ~
36648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36650 reference "sec:Index"
36658 is described in section
36659 \begin_inset space ~
36663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36665 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36671 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36674 is described in section
36675 \begin_inset space ~
36679 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36681 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36688 \begin_layout Subsection
36692 \begin_layout Standard
36693 To insert floats, as described in section
36694 \begin_inset space ~
36698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36700 reference "sec:Floats"
36704 and in detail the chapter
36711 \begin_inset space ~
36719 \begin_layout Subsection
36723 \begin_layout Standard
36724 To insert notes, described in section
36725 \begin_inset space ~
36729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36731 reference "sec:Notes"
36738 \begin_layout Subsection
36742 \begin_layout Standard
36743 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36745 Branches are described in section
36746 \begin_inset space ~
36750 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36752 reference "sec:Branches"
36759 \begin_layout Subsection
36763 \begin_layout Standard
36764 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36765 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36767 An example is the document class
36768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36775 with three custom insets.
36778 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36782 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36788 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36791 \begin_layout Subsection
36793 \begin_inset Index idx
36796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36805 \begin_layout Standard
36806 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36808 For more information see chapter
36810 External Document Parts
36813 \begin_inset space ~
36819 \begin_layout Subsection
36821 \begin_inset Index idx
36824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36833 \begin_layout Standard
36834 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36835 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36842 \begin_inset space ~
36850 \begin_layout Subsection
36854 \begin_layout Standard
36859 dialog as described in section
36860 \begin_inset space ~
36864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36866 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36873 \begin_layout Subsection
36877 \begin_layout Standard
36882 as described in section
36883 \begin_inset space ~
36887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36889 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36896 \begin_layout Subsection
36900 \begin_layout Standard
36905 as described in section
36906 \begin_inset space ~
36910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36912 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36919 \begin_layout Subsection
36921 \begin_inset Index idx
36924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36931 \begin_inset Index idx
36934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36935 Longtables ! Caption
36943 \begin_layout Standard
36944 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36945 Floats are described in section
36946 \begin_inset space ~
36950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36952 reference "sec:Floats"
36956 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36963 \begin_inset space ~
36971 \begin_layout Subsection
36975 \begin_layout Standard
36976 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36977 \begin_inset space ~
36981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36983 reference "sec:Index"
36990 \begin_layout Subsection
36994 \begin_layout Standard
36995 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36996 \begin_inset space ~
37000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37002 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
37009 \begin_layout Subsection
37013 \begin_layout Standard
37014 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
37015 Tables are described in section
37016 \begin_inset space ~
37020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37022 reference "sec:Tables"
37026 and in detail in the chapter
37033 \begin_inset space ~
37041 \begin_layout Subsection
37045 \begin_layout Standard
37051 Graphics are described in section
37052 \begin_inset space ~
37056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37058 reference "sec:Graphics"
37065 \begin_layout Subsection
37069 \begin_layout Standard
37070 Inserts a URL as described in section
37071 \begin_inset space ~
37075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37077 reference "subsec:URLs"
37084 \begin_layout Subsection
37088 \begin_layout Standard
37089 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
37090 \begin_inset space ~
37094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37096 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
37103 \begin_layout Subsection
37107 \begin_layout Standard
37108 Inserts a footnote as described in section
37109 \begin_inset space ~
37113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37115 reference "sec:Footnotes"
37122 \begin_layout Subsection
37126 \begin_layout Standard
37127 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
37128 \begin_inset space ~
37132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37134 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
37141 \begin_layout Subsection
37145 \begin_layout Standard
37146 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
37147 title or caption of a float.
37148 Inserts a short title as described in section
37149 \begin_inset space ~
37153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37155 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
37162 \begin_layout Subsection
37167 \begin_layout Standard
37168 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
37169 Code box as described in section
37170 \begin_inset space ~
37174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37176 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37183 \begin_layout Subsection
37185 \begin_inset Index idx
37188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37197 \begin_layout Standard
37198 Inserts a program listings box.
37199 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37201 Program Code Listings
37206 \begin_inset space ~
37214 \begin_layout Subsection
37218 \begin_layout Standard
37219 Inserts the actual date.
37220 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37224 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37232 \begin_inset space ~
37240 \begin_layout Subsection
37244 \begin_layout Standard
37245 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37246 \begin_inset space ~
37250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37252 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37259 \begin_layout Section
37261 \begin_inset Index idx
37264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37273 \begin_layout Standard
37274 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37275 \begin_inset space ~
37278 of the current document.
37279 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37282 \begin_layout Subsection
37286 \begin_layout Standard
37287 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37288 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37289 to jump, for example, between section
37290 \begin_inset space ~
37294 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37295 \begin_inset space ~
37298 2.5 and use the submenu
37301 \begin_inset space ~
37305 \begin_inset space ~
37312 \begin_inset space ~
37318 \begin_inset space ~
37322 \begin_inset space ~
37328 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37332 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37338 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37341 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37344 \begin_layout Standard
37345 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37349 \begin_inset space ~
37354 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37357 \begin_inset space ~
37362 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37365 \begin_layout Subsection
37366 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37369 \begin_layout Standard
37370 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37374 \begin_layout Subsection
37378 \begin_layout Standard
37379 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37380 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37381 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37385 \begin_inset space ~
37389 \begin_inset space ~
37397 \begin_layout Subsection
37401 \begin_layout Standard
37402 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37405 The \SpecialChar LyX
37406 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37408 \begin_inset space ~
37416 \begin_inset space ~
37421 manual for a detailed description.
37424 \begin_layout Section
37426 \begin_inset Index idx
37429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37438 \begin_layout Subsection
37442 \begin_layout Standard
37443 Change Tracking is described in section
37444 \begin_inset space ~
37448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37450 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37457 \begin_layout Subsection
37465 \begin_layout Standard
37466 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37467 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37468 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37470 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37471 to the clipboard or update the view.
37472 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37476 \begin_layout Subsection
37477 Start Appendix Here
37480 \begin_layout Standard
37481 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37482 as described in section
37483 \begin_inset space ~
37487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37489 reference "sec:Appendices"
37496 \begin_layout Subsection
37498 \begin_inset space ~
37504 \begin_layout Standard
37505 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37506 default output format for the document (menu
37508 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37509 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37510 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37512 \begin_inset space ~
37516 \begin_inset space ~
37522 \begin_inset space ~
37526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37528 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37532 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37535 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37536 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37538 \begin_inset space ~
37541 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37543 \begin_inset space ~
37546 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37548 \begin_inset space ~
37552 \begin_inset space ~
37558 \begin_inset space ~
37562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37564 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37568 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37569 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37571 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37572 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37574 \begin_inset space ~
37577 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37579 \begin_inset space ~
37582 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37586 \begin_inset space ~
37590 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37592 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37597 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37598 when it is first configured.
37599 The default output format is
37602 \begin_inset space ~
37610 \begin_layout Subsection
37611 View (Other Formats)
37614 \begin_layout Standard
37615 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37616 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37617 actual document with an external program.
37618 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37619 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37620 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37622 All possible formats are listed in section
37623 \begin_inset space ~
37627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37629 reference "subsec:Export"
37634 You should at least see the menu entry
37639 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37641 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37643 \begin_inset space ~
37647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37649 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37654 \begin_inset Index idx
37657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37658 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37667 \begin_layout Standard
37668 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37669 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37671 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37672 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37674 \begin_inset space ~
37677 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37679 \begin_inset space ~
37682 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37686 \begin_inset space ~
37690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37692 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37697 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37698 when it is first configured.
37701 \begin_layout Subsection
37703 \begin_inset space ~
37709 \begin_layout Standard
37710 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37711 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37714 \begin_layout Subsection
37715 Update (Other Formats)
37718 \begin_layout Standard
37719 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37720 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37723 \begin_layout Subsection
37724 View Master Document
37727 \begin_layout Standard
37728 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37744 \begin_inset space ~
37749 manual for more information on this topic).
37750 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37751 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37755 \begin_inset space ~
37759 \begin_inset space ~
37764 generates the output of the whole book, while
37768 will just output the chapter alone.
37771 \begin_layout Standard
37772 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37773 in the document settings (menu
37775 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37776 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37777 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37779 \begin_inset space ~
37783 \begin_inset space ~
37789 \begin_inset space ~
37793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37795 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37799 ) or in the preferences (menu
37801 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37802 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37804 \begin_inset space ~
37807 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37809 \begin_inset space ~
37812 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37814 \begin_inset space ~
37818 \begin_inset space ~
37824 \begin_inset space ~
37828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37830 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37837 \begin_layout Subsection
37838 Update Master Document
37841 \begin_layout Standard
37842 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37858 \begin_inset space ~
37863 manual for more information on this topic).
37864 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37865 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37868 \begin_layout Standard
37869 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37870 in the document settings (menu
37872 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37873 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37874 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37876 \begin_inset space ~
37880 \begin_inset space ~
37886 \begin_inset space ~
37890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37892 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37896 ) or in the preferences (menu
37898 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37899 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37901 \begin_inset space ~
37904 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37906 \begin_inset space ~
37909 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37911 \begin_inset space ~
37915 \begin_inset space ~
37921 \begin_inset space ~
37925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37927 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37934 \begin_layout Subsection
37936 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37938 name "subsec:Compressed"
37945 \begin_layout Standard
37946 Un/compresses the current document.
37947 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
37948 compression (see the
37950 Additional Features
37952 manual for details).
37955 \begin_layout Subsection
37959 \begin_layout Standard
37960 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
37963 \begin_layout Subsection
37967 \begin_layout Standard
37968 The document settings are described in appendix
37969 \begin_inset space ~
37973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37975 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37982 \begin_layout Section
37984 \begin_inset Index idx
37987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37996 \begin_layout Subsection
38000 \begin_layout Standard
38001 Spell checking is explained in section
38002 \begin_inset space ~
38006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38008 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
38015 \begin_layout Subsection
38019 \begin_layout Standard
38020 The thesaurus is described in section
38021 \begin_inset space ~
38025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38027 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
38034 \begin_layout Subsection
38036 \begin_inset Index idx
38039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38046 \begin_inset Index idx
38049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38058 \begin_layout Standard
38059 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
38060 the highlighted document part.
38063 \begin_layout Subsection
38069 \begin_inset Index idx
38072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38073 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38082 \begin_layout Standard
38083 Generates with the help of the program
38085 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38088 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
38089 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
38090 This feature is not available on Windows.
38093 \begin_layout Subsection
38099 \begin_inset Index idx
38102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38112 \begin_layout Standard
38113 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38118 \begin_inset space ~
38123 to see the full filename paths.
38126 \begin_layout Subsection
38128 \begin_inset Index idx
38131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38140 \begin_layout Standard
38141 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
38142 files as described in section
38143 \begin_inset space ~
38147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38149 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38156 \begin_layout Subsection
38158 \begin_inset Index idx
38161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38174 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38192 \begin_inset Index idx
38195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38196 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38205 \begin_layout Standard
38206 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
38207 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
38208 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38209 -packages and programs it needs; see
38211 \begin_inset space ~
38215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38217 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38224 \begin_layout Subsection
38228 \begin_layout Standard
38233 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38234 \begin_inset space ~
38238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38240 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38247 \begin_layout Section
38249 \begin_inset Index idx
38252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38261 \begin_layout Standard
38262 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
38263 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
38265 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38269 \begin_layout Standard
38273 \begin_inset space ~
38278 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38279 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38280 packages and classes found
38281 by \SpecialChar LyX
38283 \begin_inset space ~
38287 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38289 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38296 \begin_layout Standard
38300 \begin_inset space ~
38305 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38310 \begin_layout Section
38312 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38314 name "sec:Toolbars"
38321 \begin_layout Standard
38322 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38323 \begin_inset space ~
38327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38329 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38336 \begin_layout Standard
38337 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38338 This is described in the
38340 Additional Features
38345 \begin_layout Subsection
38347 \begin_inset Index idx
38350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38359 \begin_layout Standard
38360 \begin_inset Graphics
38361 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38369 \begin_layout Standard
38370 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38376 \begin_layout Standard
38377 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38394 \begin_inset Note Note
38397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38398 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38403 manual for more information.
38411 \begin_layout Standard
38412 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38418 \begin_layout Standard
38419 \begin_inset Tabular
38420 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38421 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38422 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38423 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38429 \begin_inset Graphics
38430 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38444 pull-down box for the environments
38457 \begin_layout Standard
38458 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38464 \begin_layout Standard
38466 \begin_inset Tabular
38467 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38468 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38469 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38470 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38471 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38494 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38501 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38524 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38531 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38554 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38561 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38570 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38584 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38591 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38600 arg "spelling-continuously"
38608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38612 Spellcheck continuously
38618 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38641 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38648 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38671 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38678 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38701 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38708 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38731 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38738 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38761 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38768 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38777 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38791 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38793 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38797 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38801 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38810 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38817 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38831 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38833 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38837 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38841 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38850 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38859 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38873 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38874 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
38881 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38902 Emphasize text, function of the
38904 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38906 \begin_inset space ~
38909 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38918 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38939 Set text to noun style, function of the
38941 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38943 \begin_inset space ~
38946 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38955 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38964 arg "textstyle-apply"
38972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38976 Format text using the current settings in the
38978 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38980 \begin_inset space ~
38983 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38992 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39015 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39016 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39018 \begin_inset space ~
39027 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39036 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
39044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39050 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39057 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39064 arg "tabular-insert"
39072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39078 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39085 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39094 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
39102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39106 Toggle outline window on/off,
39108 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
39115 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39124 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
39132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39136 Toggle math toolbar on/off
39142 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39151 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
39159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39163 Toggle table toolbar on/off
39176 \begin_layout Subsection
39178 \begin_inset Index idx
39181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39190 \begin_layout Standard
39191 \begin_inset Graphics
39192 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39200 \begin_layout Standard
39201 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39207 \begin_layout Standard
39208 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39212 \begin_layout Standard
39213 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39219 \begin_layout Standard
39220 \begin_inset Tabular
39221 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39222 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39223 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39224 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39225 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39252 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39261 arg "layout Enumerate"
39269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39279 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39288 arg "layout Itemize"
39296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39306 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39333 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39342 arg "layout Description"
39350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39360 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39369 arg "depth-increment"
39377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39383 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39385 \begin_inset space ~
39389 \begin_inset space ~
39398 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39407 arg "depth-decrement"
39415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39421 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39423 \begin_inset space ~
39427 \begin_inset space ~
39436 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39445 arg "float-insert figure"
39453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39459 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39460 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39467 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39476 arg "float-insert table"
39484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39490 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39491 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39498 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39521 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39528 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39537 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39551 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39558 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39567 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39581 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39588 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39611 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39613 \begin_inset space ~
39622 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39631 arg "nomencl-insert"
39639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39645 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39647 \begin_inset space ~
39656 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39665 arg "footnote-insert"
39673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39679 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39686 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39695 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39709 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39711 \begin_inset space ~
39720 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39743 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39744 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39746 \begin_inset space ~
39755 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39764 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39778 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39785 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39808 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39815 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39838 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39840 \begin_inset space ~
39849 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39858 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39872 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39873 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39880 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39889 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39903 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39904 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39906 \begin_inset space ~
39915 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39924 arg "dialog-show character"
39932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39938 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39940 \begin_inset space ~
39943 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39950 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39959 arg "layout-paragraph"
39967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39973 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39975 \begin_inset space ~
39984 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39993 arg "thesaurus-entry"
40001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40007 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40021 \begin_layout Subsection
40022 View/Update Toolbar
40023 \begin_inset Index idx
40026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40027 Toolbar ! View / Update
40035 \begin_layout Standard
40036 \begin_inset Graphics
40037 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
40044 \begin_layout Standard
40045 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40051 \begin_layout Standard
40052 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40056 \begin_layout Standard
40057 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40063 \begin_layout Standard
40064 \begin_inset Tabular
40065 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
40066 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40067 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40068 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40069 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40092 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40099 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40108 arg "buffer-update"
40116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40122 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40129 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40138 arg "master-buffer-view"
40146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40152 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40154 \begin_inset space ~
40163 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40172 arg "master-buffer-update"
40180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40186 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40188 \begin_inset space ~
40192 \begin_inset space ~
40201 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40210 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40224 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40225 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40226 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40227 Synchronize with Output
40233 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40256 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40257 View (Other Formats)
40263 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40270 arg "update-others"
40278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40284 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40285 Update (Other Formats)
40298 \begin_layout Standard
40299 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40303 \begin_layout Subsection
40307 \begin_layout Standard
40308 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40309 \begin_inset space ~
40313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40315 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40319 , the table toolbar
40320 \begin_inset Index idx
40323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40332 \begin_inset space ~
40337 manual and the math macro toolbar
40338 \begin_inset Index idx
40341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40354 \begin_layout Chapter
40355 The Document Settings
40356 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40358 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40363 \begin_inset Index idx
40366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40367 Document ! Settings
40375 \begin_layout Standard
40379 \begin_inset space ~
40384 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40385 is called with the menu
40387 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40391 You can save your document settings as default with the
40393 Save as Document Defaults
40395 button in any dialog.
40396 This will create a template named
40400 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40401 when you create a new document without
40405 \begin_layout Standard
40410 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40411 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40414 \begin_layout Standard
40415 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40416 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40417 to find the one you are looking for.
40418 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40419 the submenus of the dialog.
40421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40425 \begin_inset space \space{}
40429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40436 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40437 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40438 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40441 \begin_layout Section
40445 \begin_layout Standard
40446 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40448 Document classes are described in section
40449 \begin_inset space ~
40453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40455 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40463 \begin_layout Standard
40467 \begin_inset space ~
40472 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40477 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40478 as a layout for a document class.
40479 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40481 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40490 \begin_layout Standard
40491 Some classes use special class options by default.
40492 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40496 and you can decide to use them or not.
40497 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40498 recommended you leave them untouched.
40503 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40504 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40509 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40511 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40517 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40518 \begin_inset Newline newline
40523 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40526 \begin_inset Newline newline
40529 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40530 distribution, see section
40535 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40537 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40549 \begin_layout Standard
40554 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40555 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40556 in the background if the child document
40557 is opened without its master.
40558 This way child documents are always compilable.
40559 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40566 \begin_inset space ~
40574 \begin_layout Standard
40575 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40586 \begin_inset Index idx
40589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40591 -packages ! prettyref
40597 \begin_inset Index idx
40600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40602 -packages ! refstyle
40607 for cross-references, see section
40608 \begin_inset space ~
40612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40614 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40621 \begin_layout Section
40625 \begin_layout Standard
40626 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40627 Please refer to the section
40630 \begin_inset space ~
40638 \begin_inset space ~
40643 manual for details.
40646 \begin_layout Section
40650 \begin_layout Standard
40651 Modules are explained in section
40652 \begin_inset space ~
40656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40658 reference "subsec:Modules"
40665 \begin_layout Section
40669 \begin_layout Standard
40671 \begin_inset space ~
40675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40677 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
40684 \begin_layout Section
40688 \begin_layout Standard
40689 The document font settings are described in section
40690 \begin_inset space ~
40694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40696 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40703 \begin_layout Section
40707 \begin_layout Standard
40708 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40720 \begin_inset space ~
40725 and whether it should be a
40728 \begin_inset space ~
40733 can also be specified here.
40736 \begin_layout Standard
40737 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
40738 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
40739 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40741 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40744 \begin_layout Standard
40747 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
40750 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
40751 justifies the text on screen.
40752 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
40756 \begin_layout Section
40760 \begin_layout Standard
40761 This dialog is described in sections
40762 \begin_inset space ~
40766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40768 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40775 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
40782 \begin_layout Section
40786 \begin_layout Standard
40787 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40788 \begin_inset space ~
40792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40794 reference "subsec:Margins"
40801 \begin_layout Section
40803 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40805 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40810 \begin_inset Index idx
40813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40814 Language ! Encoding
40822 \begin_layout Standard
40823 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40824 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40825 (the \SpecialChar LyX
40827 is always encoded in utf8).
40828 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40829 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40830 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40831 -command is not known for
40832 a particular character).
40835 \begin_layout Standard
40836 If you use the option
40841 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40842 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40843 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40845 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40846 exactly one encoding.
40847 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40850 \begin_layout Standard
40852 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40853 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40854 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40855 installation supports Unicode), choose
40856 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40857 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40858 is quite incomplete, so
40859 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40864 (when \SpecialChar LyX
40865 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40866 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
40867 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40868 -commands is not used, because all
40869 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40870 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40871 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40872 , two new alternative engines
40873 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40875 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40877 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40880 \begin_inset space ~
40888 \begin_inset space ~
40896 \begin_inset space ~
40902 \begin_inset space ~
40906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40908 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40913 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40917 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40920 \begin_layout Standard
40924 \begin_inset space ~
40929 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40930 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40940 The possible settings are:
40943 \begin_layout Description
40944 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40946 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40947 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40951 \begin_inset space ~
40955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40957 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
40964 \begin_layout Description
40965 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40966 format you will use.
40967 In many cases this will be
40972 \begin_inset Index idx
40975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40983 If the newer package
40988 \begin_inset Index idx
40991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40993 -packages ! polyglossia
40998 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40999 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41000 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
41002 this package will be used instead of
41009 \begin_layout Description
41011 \begin_inset space ~
41022 would be more appropriate.
41025 \begin_layout Description
41026 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
41027 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
41031 (for German texts), type in
41034 \begin_inset Newline newline
41039 usepackage{ngerman}
41042 \begin_layout Description
41043 None will not use a language package.
41044 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
41047 \begin_layout Standard
41048 Here is a list with the important encodings:
41051 \begin_layout Description
41053 \begin_inset space ~
41057 \begin_inset space ~
41061 \begin_inset space ~
41068 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41074 \begin_inset Index idx
41077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41079 -packages ! inputenc
41085 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
41086 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
41087 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
41091 \begin_layout Description
41092 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
41094 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
41095 commands, which may result in a big
41096 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
41097 -commands are needed.
41100 \begin_layout Description
41102 \begin_inset space ~
41106 \begin_inset space ~
41109 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
41112 \begin_layout Description
41114 \begin_inset space ~
41118 \begin_inset space ~
41121 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
41124 \begin_layout Description
41126 \begin_inset space ~
41129 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
41132 \begin_layout Description
41134 \begin_inset space ~
41138 \begin_inset space ~
41141 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
41142 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
41145 \begin_layout Description
41147 \begin_inset space ~
41151 \begin_inset space ~
41154 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
41158 \begin_layout Description
41160 \begin_inset space ~
41164 \begin_inset space ~
41167 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
41168 ISO-8859-13 encoding
41171 \begin_layout Description
41173 \begin_inset space ~
41177 \begin_inset space ~
41181 \begin_inset space ~
41184 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
41185 \begin_inset space ~
41191 \begin_layout Description
41193 \begin_inset space ~
41197 \begin_inset space ~
41201 \begin_inset space ~
41204 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41205 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41208 \begin_layout Description
41210 \begin_inset space ~
41214 \begin_inset space ~
41217 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41218 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41219 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41220 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41221 \begin_inset space ~
41225 \begin_inset space ~
41231 \begin_layout Description
41233 \begin_inset space ~
41237 \begin_inset space ~
41240 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41241 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41242 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41244 should try to use the encoding Unicode
41245 \begin_inset space ~
41249 \begin_inset space ~
41255 \begin_layout Description
41257 \begin_inset space ~
41261 \begin_inset space ~
41264 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41267 \begin_layout Description
41269 \begin_inset space ~
41273 \begin_inset space ~
41276 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41279 \begin_layout Description
41281 \begin_inset space ~
41285 \begin_inset space ~
41288 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41291 \begin_layout Description
41293 \begin_inset space ~
41296 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41299 \begin_layout Description
41301 \begin_inset space ~
41304 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41307 \begin_layout Description
41309 \begin_inset space ~
41313 \begin_inset space ~
41316 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41319 \begin_layout Description
41321 \begin_inset space ~
41325 \begin_inset space ~
41331 \begin_layout Description
41333 \begin_inset space ~
41337 \begin_inset space ~
41340 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41343 \begin_layout Description
41345 \begin_inset space ~
41349 \begin_inset space ~
41355 \begin_layout Description
41357 \begin_inset space ~
41361 \begin_inset space ~
41364 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41370 \begin_inset Index idx
41373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41380 , when using this, set the document language to
41385 \begin_layout Description
41387 \begin_inset space ~
41391 \begin_inset space ~
41394 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41399 , when using this, set the document language to
41402 \begin_inset space ~
41408 \begin_layout Description
41410 \begin_inset space ~
41414 \begin_inset space ~
41417 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41423 \begin_inset Index idx
41426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41428 -packages ! japanese
41433 , when using this, set the document language to
41438 \begin_layout Description
41440 \begin_inset space ~
41444 \begin_inset space ~
41447 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41452 , when using this, set the document language to
41457 \begin_layout Description
41459 \begin_inset space ~
41463 \begin_inset space ~
41466 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41471 , when using this, set the document language to
41476 \begin_layout Description
41478 \begin_inset space ~
41481 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41484 \begin_layout Description
41486 \begin_inset space ~
41490 \begin_inset space ~
41494 \begin_inset space ~
41497 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41500 \begin_layout Description
41502 \begin_inset space ~
41506 \begin_inset space ~
41510 \begin_inset space ~
41513 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41514 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41515 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41518 \begin_layout Description
41520 \begin_inset space ~
41524 \begin_inset space ~
41530 \begin_layout Description
41532 \begin_inset space ~
41536 \begin_inset space ~
41539 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41540 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41543 \begin_layout Description
41545 \begin_inset space ~
41549 \begin_inset space ~
41552 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41558 \begin_inset Index idx
41561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41568 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41571 \begin_layout Description
41573 \begin_inset space ~
41581 \begin_inset space ~
41584 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41591 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41594 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41601 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41602 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41604 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41607 \begin_layout Description
41609 \begin_inset space ~
41613 \begin_inset space ~
41616 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41622 \begin_inset Index idx
41625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41632 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41635 \begin_layout Description
41637 \begin_inset space ~
41640 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41646 \begin_inset Index idx
41649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41651 -packages ! inputenc
41657 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41661 \begin_layout Description
41663 \begin_inset space ~
41667 \begin_inset space ~
41671 \begin_inset space ~
41674 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41675 \begin_inset space ~
41681 \begin_layout Description
41683 \begin_inset space ~
41687 \begin_inset space ~
41691 \begin_inset space ~
41694 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41695 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41696 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41700 \begin_layout Description
41702 \begin_inset space ~
41706 \begin_inset space ~
41710 \begin_inset space ~
41713 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41714 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41717 \begin_layout Section
41719 \begin_inset Index idx
41722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41729 \begin_inset Index idx
41732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41739 \begin_inset Index idx
41742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41743 Color ! Shaded boxes
41749 \begin_inset Index idx
41752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41753 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41761 \begin_layout Standard
41762 Here you can alter the font color for the
41766 (default: black), for
41769 \begin_inset space ~
41774 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41778 (default: white) and for
41781 \begin_inset space ~
41791 sets the color back to the default.
41794 \begin_layout Standard
41795 Clicking any button showing
41803 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41804 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41805 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41806 later more quickly.
41809 \begin_layout Standard
41810 Note, if you change the
41813 \begin_inset space ~
41818 font color and use the option
41821 \begin_inset space ~
41826 in the document settings under
41829 \begin_inset space ~
41834 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41835 \begin_inset space ~
41839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41841 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41848 \begin_layout Standard
41849 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41855 \begin_layout Standard
41859 \begin_inset space ~
41868 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41871 \begin_inset space ~
41874 Code after a forced page break:
41877 \begin_layout Itemize
41878 For the page color:
41879 \begin_inset Newline newline
41886 pagecolor{color name}
41889 \begin_layout Itemize
41890 For the text color:
41891 \begin_inset Newline newline
41901 \begin_layout Standard
41902 You are restricted to one of
41938 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
41945 \begin_inset space ~
41951 \begin_inset Newline newline
41954 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41955 names to refer to them:
41958 \begin_layout Itemize
41964 \begin_inset Newline newline
41969 page_backgroundcolor
41972 \begin_layout Itemize
41976 \begin_inset space ~
41982 \begin_inset Newline newline
41990 \begin_layout Itemize
41994 \begin_inset space ~
42000 \begin_inset Newline newline
42008 \begin_layout Itemize
42012 \begin_inset space ~
42018 \begin_inset Newline newline
42026 \begin_layout Standard
42027 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
42030 \begin_inset space ~
42038 \begin_inset space ~
42046 \begin_layout Section
42050 \begin_layout Standard
42051 Here you can adjust the
42055 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
42059 as described in section
42060 \begin_inset space ~
42064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42066 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
42073 \begin_layout Section
42077 \begin_layout Standard
42078 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42084 \begin_inset Index idx
42087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42099 \begin_inset Index idx
42102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42104 -packages ! jurabib
42112 Sectioned bibliography
42114 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42120 \begin_inset Index idx
42123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42125 -packages ! bibtopic
42130 and you can select a
42134 for the generation of the bibliography.
42135 For a further description see section
42136 \begin_inset space ~
42140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42142 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42149 \begin_layout Section
42153 \begin_layout Standard
42154 Here you can define the
42158 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
42160 \begin_inset space ~
42164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42166 reference "sec:Index"
42173 \begin_layout Section
42177 \begin_layout Standard
42178 The PDF properties are explained in section
42179 \begin_inset space ~
42183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42185 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42192 \begin_layout Section
42196 \begin_layout Standard
42197 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
42198 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42204 \begin_inset Index idx
42207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42209 -packages ! amsmath
42219 \begin_inset Index idx
42222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42224 -packages ! amssymb
42234 \begin_inset Index idx
42237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42249 \begin_inset Index idx
42252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42264 \begin_inset Index idx
42267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42269 -packages ! mathdots
42279 \begin_inset Index idx
42282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42284 -packages ! mathtools
42294 \begin_inset Index idx
42297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42309 \begin_inset Index idx
42312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42314 -packages ! stackrel
42324 \begin_inset Index idx
42327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42329 -packages ! stmaryrd
42339 \begin_inset Index idx
42342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42344 -packages ! undertilde
42349 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42352 \begin_layout Description
42353 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42354 -errors in formulas,
42355 ensure that you have this enabled.
42358 \begin_layout Description
42359 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42360 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42361 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42365 \begin_layout Description
42366 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42369 \begin_inset space ~
42381 \begin_layout Description
42382 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42385 \begin_inset space ~
42397 \begin_layout Description
42398 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42409 \begin_layout Description
42410 mathtools is used for the math commands
42446 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42453 \begin_layout Description
42454 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42456 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42465 \begin_layout Description
42466 stackrel is used for the math command
42483 \begin_layout Description
42484 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42487 \begin_layout Description
42488 undertilde is used for the math command
42496 Accents for one Character
42505 \begin_layout Section
42509 \begin_layout Standard
42510 The float placement options are described in the section
42513 \begin_inset space ~
42521 \begin_inset space ~
42529 \begin_layout Section
42533 \begin_layout Standard
42534 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42536 Program Code Listings
42541 \begin_inset space ~
42549 \begin_layout Section
42553 \begin_layout Standard
42554 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42562 set to be used and set the
42567 The itemize environment is described in section
42568 \begin_inset space ~
42572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42574 reference "sec:Itemize"
42581 \begin_layout Standard
42582 You can furthermore specify a
42585 \begin_inset space ~
42590 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42591 command of the desired character.
42592 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42599 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42601 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42605 \begin_inset space \space{}
42609 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42619 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42620 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42623 \begin_layout Standard
42624 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42632 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42633 -packages in the preamble (menu
42636 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42637 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42640 \begin_inset space ~
42646 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42650 usepackage{textcomp}
42653 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42657 usepackage{amssymb}
42667 \begin_layout Section
42671 \begin_layout Standard
42672 Branches are described in section
42673 \begin_inset space ~
42677 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42679 reference "sec:Branches"
42686 \begin_layout Section
42688 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42690 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42697 \begin_layout Standard
42698 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42701 \begin_layout Description
42703 \begin_inset space ~
42707 \begin_inset space ~
42710 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42730 View Master Document
42731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42738 Update Master Document
42739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42746 menu or the toolbar.
42747 The default is set in
42749 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42750 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42752 \begin_inset space ~
42755 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42759 \begin_inset space ~
42763 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42765 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42772 \begin_layout Description
42774 \begin_inset space ~
42778 \begin_inset space ~
42781 Output settings for the menu
42783 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42785 \begin_inset space ~
42791 For a detailed description see section
42793 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42798 \begin_inset space ~
42806 \begin_layout Description
42808 \begin_inset space ~
42812 \begin_inset space ~
42815 Options offers settings for the export format
42823 \begin_inset space ~
42828 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42829 \begin_inset space ~
42832 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42836 \begin_inset space ~
42841 settings are described in detail in section
42843 Math Output in XHTML
42848 \begin_inset space ~
42857 \begin_inset space ~
42861 \begin_inset space ~
42866 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42869 \begin_layout Section
42877 \begin_layout Standard
42878 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42880 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
42882 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42884 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42888 \begin_layout Standard
42889 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42890 -syntax is given in section
42891 \begin_inset space ~
42895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42897 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
42904 \begin_layout Chapter
42910 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42912 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42917 \begin_inset Index idx
42920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42929 \begin_layout Standard
42930 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42932 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42936 It has the following submenus.
42939 \begin_layout Section
42943 \begin_layout Subsection
42947 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42948 User Interface File
42949 \begin_inset Index idx
42952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42953 Customization ! of toolbars
42959 \begin_inset Index idx
42962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42963 Customization ! of menus
42971 \begin_layout Standard
42972 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42973 interface (ui) file.
42974 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42982 \begin_layout Description
42987 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42990 \begin_layout Description
42997 the menu entries in popup context menus
43000 \begin_layout Description
43005 specifies the toolbar buttons
43008 \begin_layout Standard
43009 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
43010 and edit the entries.
43013 \begin_layout Standard
43014 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
43026 entries must be finished with an explicit
43051 and in the case of the
43052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43064 The syntax for the entries is:
43067 \begin_layout Standard
43068 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43097 \begin_layout Standard
43099 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43102 All the \SpecialChar LyX
43103 -functions are listed in the menu
43105 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
43107 \begin_inset space ~
43115 \begin_layout Standard
43116 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
43122 \begin_layout Standard
43123 For example, assuming you use the menu
43125 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43128 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
43132 \begin_layout Standard
43133 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43157 \begin_layout Standard
43159 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43174 to have the sixth bookmark.
43177 \begin_layout Standard
43181 \begin_inset space ~
43186 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
43187 's toolbar buttons.
43188 The currently available icon sets are compared in
43189 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43192 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43199 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43203 \begin_layout Standard
43206 Enable tool tips in main work area
43208 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43212 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43216 \begin_layout Standard
43221 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
43222 should display in the menu
43224 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43226 \begin_inset space ~
43234 \begin_layout Subsection
43238 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43242 \begin_layout Standard
43245 Restore window layouts and geometries
43248 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
43249 the last \SpecialChar LyX
43253 \begin_layout Standard
43256 Restore cursor positions
43258 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43262 \begin_layout Standard
43265 Load opened files from last session
43267 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43271 \begin_layout Standard
43274 Clear all session information
43276 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43277 sessions (cursor positions, names
43278 of last opened documents, etc.).
43281 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43283 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43285 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43290 \begin_inset Index idx
43293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43302 \begin_layout Standard
43305 Backup original documents when saving
43307 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43308 it was saved the last time.
43309 It is stored in the
43312 \begin_inset space ~
43318 \begin_inset space ~
43322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43324 reference "sec:Paths"
43328 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43331 \begin_inset space ~
43337 The backup file has the file extension
43338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43352 \begin_layout Standard
43355 Backup documents, every
43357 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43360 \begin_layout Standard
43363 Save documents compressed by default
43365 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
43366 \begin_inset space ~
43370 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43372 reference "subsec:Compressed"
43377 This applies to newly created documents only.
43378 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
43381 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43382 Windows & work area
43385 \begin_layout Standard
43388 Open documents in tabs
43390 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43394 \begin_layout Standard
43399 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43406 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43412 reference "sec:Paths"
43416 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43423 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43424 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43425 of \SpecialChar LyX
43427 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43428 instance is created for each file.
43431 \begin_layout Standard
43434 Single close-tab button
43436 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43446 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43447 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43450 \begin_layout Standard
43451 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43459 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43460 before the change takes effect.
43468 \begin_layout Standard
43473 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43475 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43477 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43481 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43482 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43483 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43486 \begin_layout Subsection
43488 \begin_inset Index idx
43491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43498 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43500 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43507 \begin_layout Standard
43508 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43512 \begin_layout Standard
43513 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43521 This section only deals with the fonts
43525 the \SpecialChar LyX
43527 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43530 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43531 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43542 \begin_layout Standard
43543 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43560 (depends on the system) as its
43563 \begin_inset space ~
43579 \begin_layout Standard
43580 You can change the font size with the
43587 \begin_layout Standard
43592 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43594 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43597 points have the size of 1
43598 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43602 \begin_inset space ~
43606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43608 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43613 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43614 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43618 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43619 \begin_inset space ~
43623 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43625 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43632 \begin_layout Standard
43635 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43637 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43638 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43639 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43640 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43641 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43643 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43644 \begin_inset space ~
43650 \begin_layout Subsection
43652 \begin_inset Index idx
43655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43656 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
43663 \begin_inset Index idx
43666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43675 \begin_layout Standard
43676 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
43677 by choosing an item in the
43678 list and selecting the
43685 \begin_layout Standard
43686 By checking the option
43690 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43693 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43694 \begin_inset space ~
43698 \begin_inset space ~
43703 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43706 \begin_layout Subsection
43708 \begin_inset Index idx
43711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43720 \begin_layout Standard
43721 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
43725 \begin_layout Standard
43730 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43731 This feature is described in section
43732 \begin_inset space ~
43736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43738 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43745 \begin_layout Standard
43746 Checking the option
43749 \begin_inset space ~
43753 \begin_inset space ~
43757 \begin_inset space ~
43762 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43765 \begin_layout Section
43767 \begin_inset Index idx
43770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43779 \begin_layout Subsection
43783 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43787 \begin_layout Standard
43790 Cursor follows scrollbar
43792 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43796 \begin_layout Standard
43797 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43798 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43799 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43802 \begin_layout Standard
43805 Scroll below end of document
43807 is self-explanatory.
43810 \begin_layout Standard
43811 In \SpecialChar LyX
43812 one can jump from word to word by pressing
43819 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43821 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43822 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43825 \begin_layout Standard
43828 Sort environments alphabetically
43830 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43833 \begin_layout Standard
43836 Group environments by their category
43838 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43841 \begin_layout Standard
43846 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43857 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43861 \begin_layout Standard
43862 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43867 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43868 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43872 \begin_layout Subsection
43874 \begin_inset Index idx
43877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43884 \begin_inset Index idx
43887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43888 Settings ! Shortcuts
43896 \begin_layout Standard
43901 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
43903 Several binding files are available, among them:
43906 \begin_layout Description
43907 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43910 \begin_layout Description
43911 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43923 \begin_layout Description
43924 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43927 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43935 \begin_layout Standard
43936 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43941 , and binding files for special languages.
43942 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43943 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43947 \begin_inset space \space{}
43951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43959 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
43960 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
43961 will try to use the appropriate binding
43965 \begin_layout Standard
43966 Some binding files, like
43970 , only have a limited scope.
43971 When looking at the end of the file
43975 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43978 \begin_layout Standard
43982 \begin_inset space ~
43986 \begin_inset space ~
43991 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43992 in the selected key binding file.
43995 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43997 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43999 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
44004 \begin_inset Index idx
44007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44008 Key Bindings ! Editing
44016 \begin_layout Standard
44017 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
44018 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
44019 functions and the bound shortcuts.
44020 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
44023 Show key-bindings containing
44026 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
44027 Insert there for example as keyword
44028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44035 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
44036 functions that contain
44037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44045 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
44046 All \SpecialChar LyX
44047 functions are also listed in the file
44052 that you will find in the
44059 \begin_layout Standard
44060 For example, to add the shortcut
44068 , select the function and press the
44073 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
44074 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
44077 \begin_layout Standard
44078 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
44079 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
44081 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
44082 function names as a semicolon separated list.
44084 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
44089 \begin_layout Standard
44090 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
44093 \begin_layout Standard
44094 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
44096 The syntax of the entries is:
44099 \begin_layout Standard
44105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44124 \begin_layout Subsection
44126 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44128 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
44133 \begin_inset Index idx
44136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44143 \begin_inset Index idx
44146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44147 Settings ! Keyboard Map
44155 \begin_layout Standard
44156 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
44157 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
44158 provides keyboard maps.
44159 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
44160 is a Romanian one, you can enable
44163 \begin_inset space ~
44167 \begin_inset space ~
44172 and select the keyboard map file named
44179 \begin_layout Standard
44188 keyboard map and, if you use the
44192 bindings, you can select the first and second with
44195 arg "keymap-primary"
44201 arg "keymap-secondary"
44204 respectively or toggle between them with
44207 arg "keymap-toggle"
44213 \begin_layout Standard
44214 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44222 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44231 \begin_layout Standard
44232 You can also specify the mouse
44234 Wheel scrolling speed
44237 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44241 Middle mouse button pasting
44243 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
44244 inserts the content of the clipboard.
44247 \begin_layout Standard
44255 \begin_inset space ~
44259 \begin_inset space ~
44264 you can select a key for zooming.
44265 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44268 \begin_layout Subsection
44272 \begin_layout Standard
44273 Input completion is described in section
44274 \begin_inset space ~
44278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44280 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44287 \begin_layout Section
44289 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44296 \begin_inset Index idx
44299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44306 \begin_inset Index idx
44309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44318 \begin_layout Standard
44319 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44320 are normally determined during
44322 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44325 \begin_layout Description
44327 \begin_inset space ~
44330 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44331 's working directory.
44332 It is the default when you
44343 \begin_inset space ~
44351 \begin_layout Description
44353 \begin_inset space ~
44356 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44358 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44360 \begin_inset space ~
44364 \begin_inset space ~
44372 \begin_layout Description
44374 \begin_inset space ~
44377 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44383 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44387 \begin_inset Newline newline
44391 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44403 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44404 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44412 \begin_layout Description
44414 \begin_inset space ~
44418 \begin_inset Index idx
44421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44427 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44428 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44429 \begin_inset space ~
44433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44435 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44443 will be used to save the backups.
44444 \begin_inset Newline newline
44447 Backup files have the ending
44448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44458 \begin_layout Description
44460 \begin_inset space ~
44463 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44464 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44466 \begin_inset Newline newline
44473 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44479 You can edit this file with the program
44488 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44489 in its preferences under
44492 \begin_inset space ~
44498 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44503 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44505 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44506 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44512 and \SpecialChar LyX
44513 need to be running the same time.
44514 \begin_inset Newline newline
44517 The pipe is also used for the
44522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44528 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44533 \begin_inset Newline newline
44536 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44537 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44538 \begin_inset Newline newline
44554 \begin_layout Description
44556 \begin_inset space ~
44559 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44562 \begin_layout Description
44564 \begin_inset space ~
44567 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44568 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44569 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44572 \begin_layout Description
44574 \begin_inset space ~
44577 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44583 You only need to specify it if you are using
44587 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44589 For \SpecialChar LyX
44594 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44598 \begin_layout Description
44600 \begin_inset space ~
44603 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44604 When \SpecialChar LyX
44605 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44606 to find it on the system.
44607 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44609 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44611 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44615 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44618 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44619 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44622 \begin_layout Description
44624 \begin_inset space ~
44627 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44628 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44629 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44630 code or in the document
44632 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44634 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44635 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44636 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44637 scanned for the input files.
44638 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44639 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44641 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44642 compilation may fail for some documents.
44645 \begin_layout Section
44649 \begin_layout Standard
44650 Here you can insert your
44659 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44661 \begin_inset space ~
44665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44667 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44671 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44674 \begin_layout Section
44676 \begin_inset Index idx
44679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44680 Language ! Settings
44686 \begin_inset Index idx
44689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44690 Settings ! Language
44698 \begin_layout Subsection
44700 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44702 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44709 \begin_layout Description
44711 \begin_inset space ~
44715 \begin_inset space ~
44718 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
44720 You can find its actual translation status here:
44721 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44723 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44730 \begin_layout Description
44732 \begin_inset space ~
44735 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
44736 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
44737 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44738 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44755 The most widespread language package is
44760 \begin_inset Index idx
44763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44770 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
44772 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44773 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44774 come with the alternative
44780 \begin_inset Index idx
44783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44785 -packages ! polyglossia
44790 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44791 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44797 The available selections are described in section
44798 \begin_inset space ~
44802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44804 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44811 \begin_layout Description
44813 \begin_inset space ~
44816 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44817 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
44818 you can here specify the command to start the package.
44819 An example is the start command
44825 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44827 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
44831 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44846 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44851 \begin_layout Description
44853 \begin_inset space ~
44861 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44862 command toggles the package on and off.
44865 \begin_layout Description
44867 \begin_inset space ~
44871 \begin_inset space ~
44874 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44878 \begin_layout Description
44880 \begin_inset space ~
44884 \begin_inset space ~
44887 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
44891 \begin_layout Description
44893 \begin_inset space ~
44897 \begin_inset space ~
44900 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44901 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44902 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
44904 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44911 \begin_layout Description
44913 \begin_inset space ~
44916 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44918 When this option is not set, the
44921 \begin_inset space ~
44926 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44928 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44931 \begin_inset space ~
44939 \begin_layout Description
44941 \begin_inset space ~
44947 \begin_inset space ~
44953 When it is not set, the
44956 \begin_inset space ~
44961 is set to the end of the document.
44964 \begin_layout Description
44966 \begin_inset space ~
44970 \begin_inset space ~
44973 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44974 language will be underlined in blue.
44977 \begin_layout Description
44979 \begin_inset space ~
44983 \begin_inset space ~
44986 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44987 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44990 \begin_layout Description
44992 \begin_inset space ~
44995 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44996 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44997 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44998 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
45001 \begin_layout Subsection
45005 \begin_layout Standard
45006 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
45007 \begin_inset space ~
45011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45013 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
45020 \begin_layout Section
45024 \begin_layout Subsection
45028 \begin_layout Description
45030 \begin_inset space ~
45033 search Commands that will be used for the menu
45035 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45037 \begin_inset space ~
45043 For a detailed description see section
45045 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45050 \begin_inset space ~
45058 \begin_layout Description
45060 \begin_inset space ~
45066 \begin_layout Description
45068 \begin_inset space ~
45072 \begin_inset space ~
45075 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
45078 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45079 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
45081 \begin_inset space ~
45087 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
45090 \begin_layout Description
45092 \begin_inset space ~
45096 \begin_inset Index idx
45099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45106 \begin_inset Index idx
45109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45110 Settings ! Date format
45115 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
45116 \begin_inset Newline newline
45120 \begin_inset Flex URL
45123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45125 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
45131 \begin_inset Newline newline
45134 For example the format
45135 \begin_inset Newline newline
45139 \begin_inset Newline newline
45142 prints the date as day/month/year.
45145 \begin_layout Description
45147 \begin_inset space ~
45151 \begin_inset space ~
45154 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
45155 is allowed to overwrite on export.
45158 \begin_layout Description
45160 \begin_inset space ~
45163 search Commands that will be used for the menu
45165 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45167 \begin_inset space ~
45173 For a detailed description see section
45175 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45180 \begin_inset space ~
45188 \begin_layout Subsection
45194 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45196 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
45201 \begin_inset Index idx
45204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45205 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
45214 \begin_layout Description
45216 \begin_inset space ~
45224 \begin_inset space ~
45228 \begin_inset space ~
45231 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45236 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45257 are used for Cyrillic.
45258 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45271 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45273 sets up in the background.
45274 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45277 \begin_layout Description
45279 \begin_inset space ~
45283 \begin_inset space ~
45287 \begin_inset space ~
45291 \begin_inset space ~
45294 options They only have an effect when the program
45298 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45301 \begin_layout Standard
45302 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45303 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45304 manuals of the applications.
45307 \begin_layout Description
45309 \begin_inset space ~
45312 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45313 \begin_inset space ~
45317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45319 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45326 \begin_layout Description
45328 \begin_inset space ~
45331 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45332 \begin_inset space ~
45336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45338 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45345 \begin_layout Description
45347 \begin_inset space ~
45350 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45351 \begin_inset space ~
45355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45357 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45364 \begin_layout Description
45370 \begin_inset space ~
45373 command Command for the program
45375 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45378 that is described in the section
45380 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45385 Additional Features
45390 \begin_layout Standard
45391 There are additionally the following options:
45394 \begin_layout Description
45396 \begin_inset space ~
45400 \begin_inset space ~
45404 \begin_inset space ~
45408 \begin_inset space ~
45413 \begin_inset space ~
45416 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45434 to separate folders.
45435 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45437 \begin_inset Index idx
45440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45447 \begin_inset Index idx
45450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45459 \begin_layout Description
45461 \begin_inset space ~
45465 \begin_inset space ~
45469 \begin_inset space ~
45473 \begin_inset space ~
45477 \begin_inset space ~
45481 \begin_inset space ~
45484 changes Removes all manually set
45490 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45491 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45493 \begin_inset space ~
45498 dialog when changing the document class.
45501 \begin_layout Section
45503 \begin_inset space ~
45507 \begin_inset Index idx
45510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45519 \begin_layout Subsection
45521 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45523 name "subsec:Converters"
45528 \begin_inset Index idx
45531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45540 \begin_layout Standard
45541 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45542 from one format to another.
45543 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45544 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45551 \begin_inset space ~
45556 field and press the
45561 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45565 \begin_inset space ~
45570 drop-down list, modify the
45574 field and press the
45581 \begin_layout Standard
45584 Converter File Cache
45590 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45592 Maximum Age (in days
45595 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45596 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45599 \begin_layout Standard
45600 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45601 definition, is described in the section
45612 \begin_layout Subsection
45614 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45616 name "sec:File-Formats"
45621 \begin_inset Index idx
45624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45631 \begin_inset Index idx
45634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45643 \begin_layout Standard
45644 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
45654 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45657 \begin_layout Standard
45658 You can also define the
45660 Default output format
45662 that is used when you use
45664 View, Update, View Master Document
45668 Update Master Document
45674 menu or the toolbar.
45677 \begin_layout Standard
45678 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45689 \begin_layout Standard
45690 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
45692 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45693 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45694 This is done by specifying a
45699 More about this is described in the section
45710 \begin_layout Chapter
45711 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45713 \begin_inset Index idx
45716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45723 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45725 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45732 \begin_layout Standard
45734 \begin_inset space ~
45738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45740 reference "tab:Units"
45744 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45745 and used in this documentation.
45748 \begin_layout Standard
45749 \begin_inset Float table
45755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45756 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45759 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45774 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45782 \begin_inset Tabular
45783 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
45784 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
45785 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45786 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45787 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45920 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45924 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45993 scaled point (65536
45994 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45998 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46035 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46068 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46072 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
46076 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46109 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46113 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46145 % of original image width
46150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46427 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46431 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46461 \begin_layout Chapter
46463 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46465 name "chap:Credits"
46472 \begin_layout Standard
46473 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46474 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46477 \begin_layout Itemize
46480 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46483 \begin_layout Itemize
46489 \begin_layout Itemize
46495 \begin_layout Itemize
46501 \begin_layout Itemize
46507 \begin_layout Itemize
46513 \begin_layout Itemize
46519 \begin_layout Itemize
46525 \begin_layout Itemize
46528 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46531 \begin_layout Itemize
46537 \begin_layout Itemize
46543 \begin_layout Itemize
46549 \begin_layout Itemize
46555 \begin_layout Itemize
46561 \begin_layout Itemize
46567 \begin_layout Itemize
46573 \begin_layout Itemize
46579 \begin_layout Itemize
46580 The \SpecialChar LyX
46582 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46591 \begin_layout Standard
46592 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46595 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46602 \begin_layout Bibliography
46603 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46604 LatexCommand bibitem
46610 The \SpecialChar LyX
46612 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46615 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46620 \begin_inset Newline newline
46624 \begin_inset Flex URL
46627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46629 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46637 \begin_layout Bibliography
46638 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46639 LatexCommand bibitem
46640 key "latexcompanion"
46644 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46646 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46647 Companion Second Edition.
46650 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46653 \begin_layout Bibliography
46654 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46655 LatexCommand bibitem
46660 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46663 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46667 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46670 \begin_layout Bibliography
46671 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46672 LatexCommand bibitem
46680 : A Document Preparation System.
46683 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46686 \begin_layout Bibliography
46687 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46688 LatexCommand bibitem
46697 The \SpecialChar TeX
46701 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46704 \begin_layout Bibliography
46705 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46706 LatexCommand bibitem
46711 The \SpecialChar TeX
46713 \begin_inset Newline newline
46717 \begin_inset Flex URL
46720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46722 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46730 \begin_layout Bibliography
46731 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46732 LatexCommand bibitem
46737 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46739 \begin_inset Newline newline
46743 \begin_inset Flex URL
46746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46748 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
46756 \begin_layout Bibliography
46757 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46758 LatexCommand bibitem
46764 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46766 name "Documentation"
46767 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46773 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46777 \begin_inset Newline newline
46781 \begin_inset Flex URL
46784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46786 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46794 \begin_layout Bibliography
46795 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46796 LatexCommand bibitem
46802 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46804 name "Documentation"
46805 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46809 how to use the program
46811 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46815 \begin_inset Newline newline
46819 \begin_inset Flex URL
46822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46824 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46832 \begin_layout Bibliography
46833 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46834 LatexCommand bibitem
46840 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46842 name "Documentation"
46843 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46852 \begin_inset Newline newline
46856 \begin_inset Flex URL
46859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46861 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46869 \begin_layout Bibliography
46870 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46871 LatexCommand bibitem
46872 key "makeindex-man"
46877 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46880 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
46889 \begin_inset Newline newline
46893 \begin_inset Flex URL
46896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46898 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
46906 \begin_layout Bibliography
46907 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46908 LatexCommand bibitem
46914 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46916 name "Documentation"
46917 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46926 \begin_inset Newline newline
46930 \begin_inset Flex URL
46933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46935 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46943 \begin_layout Bibliography
46944 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46945 LatexCommand bibitem
46951 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46953 name "Documentation"
46954 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46958 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
46960 \begin_inset Newline newline
46964 \begin_inset Flex URL
46967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46969 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46977 \begin_layout Bibliography
46978 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46979 LatexCommand bibitem
46985 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46987 name "Documentation"
46988 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46992 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46998 \begin_inset Index idx
47001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47003 -packages ! caption
47009 \begin_inset Newline newline
47013 \begin_inset Flex URL
47016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47018 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
47026 \begin_layout Bibliography
47027 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47028 LatexCommand bibitem
47034 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47036 name "Documentation"
47037 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
47041 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47047 \begin_inset Index idx
47050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47052 -packages ! enumitem
47058 \begin_inset Newline newline
47062 \begin_inset Flex URL
47065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47067 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
47075 \begin_layout Bibliography
47076 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47077 LatexCommand bibitem
47083 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47085 name "Documentation"
47086 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
47090 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47096 \begin_inset Index idx
47099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47101 -packages ! fancyhdr
47107 \begin_inset Newline newline
47111 \begin_inset Flex URL
47114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47116 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
47124 \begin_layout Bibliography
47125 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47126 LatexCommand bibitem
47132 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47134 name "Documentation"
47135 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
47139 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47145 \begin_inset Index idx
47148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47150 -packages ! hyperref
47156 \begin_inset Newline newline
47160 \begin_inset Flex URL
47163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47165 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
47173 \begin_layout Bibliography
47174 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47175 LatexCommand bibitem
47181 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47183 name "Documentation"
47184 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
47188 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47194 \begin_inset Index idx
47197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47199 -packages ! nomencl
47205 \begin_inset Newline newline
47209 \begin_inset Flex URL
47212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47214 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
47222 \begin_layout Bibliography
47223 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47224 LatexCommand bibitem
47230 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47232 name "Documentation"
47233 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47237 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47243 \begin_inset Index idx
47246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47248 -packages ! prettyref
47254 \begin_inset Newline newline
47258 \begin_inset Flex URL
47261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47263 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
47271 \begin_layout Bibliography
47272 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47273 LatexCommand bibitem
47279 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47281 name "Documentation"
47282 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
47286 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47292 \begin_inset Index idx
47295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47297 -packages ! refstyle
47303 \begin_inset Newline newline
47307 \begin_inset Flex URL
47310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47312 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
47320 \begin_layout Bibliography
47321 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47322 LatexCommand bibitem
47328 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47331 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47335 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47337 \begin_inset Newline newline
47341 \begin_inset Flex URL
47344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47346 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47354 \begin_layout Bibliography
47355 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47356 LatexCommand bibitem
47362 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47365 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47369 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47371 \begin_inset Newline newline
47375 \begin_inset Flex URL
47378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47380 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47388 \begin_layout Bibliography
47389 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47390 LatexCommand bibitem
47396 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47399 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47403 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47404 for Cyrillic languages:
47405 \begin_inset Newline newline
47409 \begin_inset Flex URL
47412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47414 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47422 \begin_layout Bibliography
47423 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47424 LatexCommand bibitem
47430 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47433 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47437 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47439 \begin_inset Newline newline
47443 \begin_inset Flex URL
47446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47448 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47456 \begin_layout Bibliography
47457 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47458 LatexCommand bibitem
47464 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47467 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47471 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47473 \begin_inset Newline newline
47477 \begin_inset Flex URL
47480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47482 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47490 \begin_layout Bibliography
47491 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47492 LatexCommand bibitem
47498 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47501 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47505 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47507 \begin_inset Newline newline
47511 \begin_inset Flex URL
47514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47516 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47524 \begin_layout Bibliography
47525 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47526 LatexCommand bibitem
47532 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47535 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47539 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47541 \begin_inset Newline newline
47545 \begin_inset Flex URL
47548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47550 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47558 \begin_layout Bibliography
47559 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47560 LatexCommand bibitem
47566 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47569 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47573 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47575 \begin_inset Newline newline
47579 \begin_inset Flex URL
47582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47584 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47592 \begin_layout Bibliography
47593 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47594 LatexCommand bibitem
47600 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47603 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47607 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47609 \begin_inset Newline newline
47613 \begin_inset Flex URL
47616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47618 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47626 \begin_layout Bibliography
47627 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47628 LatexCommand bibitem
47634 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47637 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47641 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47643 \begin_inset Newline newline
47647 \begin_inset Flex URL
47650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47652 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47660 \begin_layout Bibliography
47661 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47662 LatexCommand bibitem
47668 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47671 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47675 about new features in
47681 \begin_inset Newline newline
47685 \begin_inset Flex URL
47688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47690 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47698 \begin_layout Standard
47699 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47733 \begin_inset Note Note
47736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47743 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47744 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47745 bibliography is the second one:
47753 \begin_layout Standard
47754 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47755 LatexCommand bibtex
47756 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47757 options "biblio/alphadin"
47764 \begin_layout Standard
47765 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47769 \begin_layout Standard
47770 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47771 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47777 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47778 LatexCommand printindex